Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server User Manual. Version 14.6

Transcription

1 Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server User Manual Version 14.6 Worldwide Headquarters 3301 Benson Drive Raleigh, NC USA EMEA/APAC Headquarters 100 Saint Paul's Churchyard London, EC4M 8BU UK

2 Spreadsheet Server All rights reserved. No parts of this work may be reproduced in any form or by any means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage and retrieval systems - without the written permission of the publisher. Microsoft, Excel, Windows, Outlook, Office, Word, Access, and SQL Server are all registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, iseries and Lotus are trademarks or registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. GroupWise is a registered trademark of Novell. BPCS and INFINIUM are registered trademarks of Infor Global Solutions in the United States and/or other countries. JACK HENRY trademarks are owned by Jack Henry & Associates, Inc. Lawson and Movex are registered trademarks of Lawson Software, Inc. and its affiliates. Oracle, JD Edwards, and PeopleSoft are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Salesforce is a trademark of salesforce.com, inc. and is used here with permission. SAP is a registered trademark of SAP AG. Trade names referenced are the service marks, trademarks, or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers in the United States and/or other countries. Global Software, Inc. is not associated or affiliated in any manner with the respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks unless expressly stated otherwise. The respective owners of the foregoing trademarks, trade names or service marks have not endorsed, certified or approved any of Global Software, Inc.'s products for use in connection with their respective products. While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document, the publisher and the author assume no responsibility for errors or omissions, or for damages resulting from the use of information contained in this document or from the use of programs and source code that may accompany it. In no event shall the publisher and the author be liable for any loss of profit or any other commercial damage caused or alleged to have been caused directly or indirectly by this document. Printed: May 2017

3 Contents I Table of Contents Part I Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1 1 General... Ledger Reporting Overview 2 2 Query /... Query Designer Overview 3 3 Distribution... Manager Overview 4 4 Spreadsheet... Writeback Overview 5 5 Profile... Scheduler Overview 6 Part II Installation and Registration 7 1 Additional... Components 7 2 Register... Add-In 10 3 Uninstall... Process 11 Part III Navigation 12 1 SS Ribbon SS Right... Click Context Menu 18 Part IV Sign On 19 Part V Control Panel 20 Part VI SS Settings 24 Part VII GL Reporting 40 1 Build a... Template 41 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet 46 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Insert Colum n Data Only 47 Build a Tem plate... GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data 48 2 Formula... Assistant 49 3 GXL Formula... for Account Values 55 4 Account... Segment Syntax 56 5 List Accounts... for a GXL Formula 57 6 Expand/Collapse... Row for a GXL Formula 58 7 Locate... Segment 60 8 Spreadsheet... Server Segment Lists 62 Create/Maintain... Segm ent Lists 62 Using Segm ent... Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Form ula 66 SSLDESC Form... ula 67 View or Modify... Segm ent List Values from w ithin Excel 68 9 Calculations Calculation Options Global Software, Inc.

4 II Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 View /Refresh... Local Cache 70 View /Refresh... Global Cache 72 Disable/Enable... Form ula Calculations Drill Down... Functionality 75 General Grid Features Copy/Export... Records 78 Copy to Excel... w ith Layout 79 Drill Dow n to Detailed... Account Balances 81 Drill Dow n to Sum... m arized Account Balances 82 Drill Dow n to Multi-Colum... n Account Balances 83 Drill Dow n to Journals... per Account(s) 84 Drill Dow n to Journal... Entry Lines 86 Drill Dow n to Detail... Journal Entry Lines 87 Drill Dow n to Subsystem... Detail 88 Drill Dow n to Selected... Ad Hoc Miscellaneous... Features 90 List Accounts Account Security SS Validation Generate Account... Detail for Current Sheet 94 Expand Detail... Reports (GXE) 95 Expand to Account... Balances 96 Expand to Journals Hide Row s w... ith Zero Balances 102 Reset Host Server... Connection 103 SS View Log Upgrade Segm... ent List 106 Upgrade Workbook Analyst Analyst Analyst Analyst Analyst Analyst Sign... On 108 Ledger... Specifics 110 Build... a Tem plate for GXL 111 GXL GXD BPCS BPCS Sign On BPCS 4.05 Ledger... Specifics 116 BPCS 6.02 Ledger... Specifics 118 BPCS Ledger... Specifics 120 BPCS Build a... Tem plate for GXL 122 BPCS GXL BPCS GXD BPCS 6+ GSV BPCS GXA BPCS Load Local... Data Data... Warehouse 131 Data Warehouse... Sign On 131 Data Warehouse... Ledger Specifics 132 Data Warehouse... Build a Tem plate for GXL 133 Data Warehouse... GXL 134 Data Warehouse... GXD Designer... GL Global Software, Inc.

5 Contents Designer Designer Designer Designer III GL... Sign On 137 GL... Ledger Specifics 138 GL... Build a Tem plate for GXL 140 GL... GXL Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Infinium Sign... On 143 Ledger... Specifics 144 Build... a Tem plate for GXL 145 GXL GXD Jack... Henry 151 JH Sign On JH Ledger Specifics JH Build a Tem... plate for GXL 154 JH GXL JH GXD JD Edwards JDE Sign On JDE Ledger Specifics JDE Build a Tem... plate for GXL 161 JDE Form ula... Assistant for GXL 162 JDE Form ula... Assistant for GXSALES 164 JDE GXL JDE GXD JDE GXSALES JDE GXSALES... Drill Dow n 171 JDE Fixed Asset... Balances 172 JDE FASTR Report... Conversion Lawson Law son Sign... On 175 Law son Ledger... Specifics 176 Law son Build... a Tem plate for GXL 177 Law son GXL Law son GXD Movex Movex Sign On Movex Ledger... Specifics 182 Movex Build... a Tem plate for GXL 183 Movex GXL Movex GXD Oracle Oracle Sign On Oracle Ledger... Specifics 189 Oracle Build a... Tem plate for GXL 191 Oracle GXL Oracle GXD Segm ent Mapping PeopleSoft PSoft PSoft PSoft PSoft Sign On Ledger... Specifics 199 Build a... Tem plate for GXL 200 GXL Global Software, Inc.

6 IV Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 PSoft GXD SAP SAP Sign On SAP Ledger Specifics SAP Build a Tem... plate for GXL 207 SAP GXL SAP GXD Part VIII Query Build... a Template for Queries 214 SAP Explorer Formula... Assistant for Queries GEXQ... Formula GEXD... Formula 230 GEXD Targeting... a Cell 233 GEXD Targeting... a Range 235 GEXD Targeting... a Table 237 Execute SAP... T-Code w ithout a GEXD Form ula 239 Execute Query... w ithout a GEXD Form ula GEXS... Formula GEXI... Formula Execute... Lookup Download... Queries from Query Exchange 251 Part IX Query Designer Query... Designer Architecture 253 QD Ribbon Explorer File... System Panel 258 Query Menu Query View Panel Table Menu Table Field... Menu 262 Field List Panel Field List Menu Builder Panel Custom Buttons Param eters Panel SQL Text Panel QuickText Panel SAP Panel QD Settings Connections Update Query... Connections Create... a New Query Save... the Query for the First Time Add Tables Create... Relationships Global Software, Inc.

7 Contents V 8 Select... or Create Query Fields 286 Fields Used Direct... from Source Table 287 Add Image... Field Type 288 Preview Data Assign Aliases... to Fields 290 Create/Edit Calculated... Fields 292 Select Fields... from a Table 293 Create Date... Fields 295 Use the CASE... Builder 297 GEXD Row Get Values Add Criteria Hard Coded Criteria Create and Use... Param eters 307 Parameters... in Query Designer vs Excel 307 Standard... Parameters in the Query Designer 308 Use Parameter to... Supply Database/Library Name 310 Smart Parms... Criteria Entry Rules 311 Smart Parms... in the Query Designer 312 Parameters... in Excel 314 Sub Query Colum... n 315 Assign Query GEXD Lim it Create... a Totals (Group By) Query Create... the GEXQ Field SQL... SHELL Function Execute... Query Legacy... Ad Hoc Queries Query... Management 326 Dow nload or... Send Query Exchange Queries 327 Textual Query... Definition QD View... Log 330 Part X Distribution Manager DM Navigation DM Ribbon DM Right Click... Context Menu DM Settings Create... a Distribution Control Worksheet Add Specification... Rows Maintain... Specification Rows Distribute... Specifications Miscellaneous... DM Items 349 Merge Data Narrative Reporting Distributor... Ribbon 353 Distributor... Formula Assistant 354 Preview Narrative... Reporting Results Global Software, Inc.

8 VI Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Cache Address... Book 357 Local Address... List 358 DM View Log Part XI Spreadsheet Writeback SWB... Ribbon Oracle... APIs Writeback Setup 363 Oracle APIs -... Build a Tem plate 364 Single API... Method 365 Template Method Builder Sheet Loader Sheet Generic... Tables Writeback Setup 372 Brow se for Database Generic Tables... - Build a Tem plate 376 Generic Tables... - Data Row s 379 Generic Tables... - Writeback Definition Exam ple 380 Generic Tables... - Rem ove Writeback Database Connection 381 Generic Tables... - Delete Writeback Definition Writeback... Processing 384 Preview Writebacks... and Process Selected Row s 385 Validate Writebacks Run Writebacks Generic Tables... - Delete Data Miscellaneous... Items 393 SWB View Log Part XII Profile Scheduler Address... Book Cache Distribution... Manager Custom... Table Loads 401 Build Select Query Custom View... s Load... Local INF Load... Local JDE Schedule... Job Define... Mapped Drives Miscellaneous... PS Items 425 PS Settings PS View Log Database Managem... ent 429 Index Global Software, Inc.

9 Spreadsheet Server Introduction 1 1 Spreadsheet Server Introduction Spreadsheet Server, Powered by the QueryExchange (formerly known as Executive Dash or EDASH) is the backbone of Global Software, Inc.'s Microsoft Excel-based Automation Roadmap that allows organizations to gain live and dynamic access from their respective ERP or relational database from within Excel to data such as: GL, AP, AR, PO, Inventory, Manufacturing, Rent Roll, Sales, Projects, Time & Attendance information and more Spreadsheet Server converts Excel into a tightly integrated analytical tool for any ERP system. Users can leverage the strength of their spreadsheets with seamless dynamic integration to their information, along with powerful drill-down capability to the lowest level of detail. It allows users to build a range of reports from simple ad hoc workbooks to complex dashboard-type views of critical business data. Spreadsheet Server eliminates the re-keying or downloading of data into the spreadsheet and makes the spreadsheet an integral part of the application. While maintaining the full functionality of their Excel spreadsheet application, Spreadsheet Server allows the user to mix GL and Non-GL data in a single worksheet. The combination of powerful spreadsheet functions (charting, graphing, text formatting and sorting) and dynamic information provides the basics for building accurate, elegant income statements, balance sheets, and other critical statements. Spreadsheet Server Components The Spreadsheet Server application consists of four components: Excel Add In for Financial Reporting across ERP platforms -- Spreadsheet Server formulas used in Excel allow users to create reports using familiar business and accounting terms, not technical specifications. Query Designer -- A user friendly tool which enables users to design and maintain queries over any relational database. These queries can be combined with pre-configured formulas in a single Excel spreadsheet. Query Exchange -- An online repository of queries from which the user may download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. Utilized in the Query Exchange, the SmartPak feature is way to group pre configured queries together. Distribution Manager -- Eliminating the time-consuming tasks of printing, copying, or creating attachments just to get information to your end-users, this tool automates the scheduling of report distribution from directly within Excel. Spreadsheet Writeback -- A powerful tool used to write data from an Excel spreadsheet to a database. Profile Scheduler -- This component allows for scheduling various tasks such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files. Spreadsheet Server Licensed Features Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user. General Ledger -- access to General Ledger related formulas in the Excel Add-in component. Query -- access to query related formulas in the Excel Add-In component and access to Query Exchange. Query Designer -- access to the Query Designer and Query Exchange components. Distribution Manager -- access to the Distribution Manager component. Writeback -- access to the Spreadsheet Writeback component. Limited Licensing -- restricts access to various Spreadsheet Server features (i.e. Build a Template, Formula Assistant, Segment Lists, Locate Segment, List Accounts, Data Validation, and Upgrade Workbook). Global Software, Inc.

10 2 1.1 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 General Ledger Reporting Overview The General Ledger (GL) Reporting feature of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server converts familiar spreadsheet software (Excel) into a tightly integrated analytical tool for financial systems. Spreadsheet Server uses specific formulas to retrieve General Ledger data on the spreadsheet, and gives the user the ability to drill-down to detail. Features (*) Retrieve dynamic balances based on ledger specific formats and time periods (Period, Quarter, Year-to-Date, etc.) Retrieve balances using single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field Retrieve account descriptions Drill down to detailed account balances Drill down to journal detail for selected accounts Drill down to journal lines for a selected journal entry Drill down to subsystem detail for a selected journal entry Copy drill down data and paste into spreadsheets or other documents (*) Available features vary based upon the selected ledger being processed. Benefits Leverage spreadsheet skills and write reports within minutes Eliminate requirement for IT or super-users to create/change financial reports No more downloading or re-keying of spreadsheet data Reduce number of days to close financial books; save just 3 hours per month per user and the investment is paid for in less than 12 months Publish executive-quality reports from current spreadsheet software Increase the efficiency and timeliness of the budgeting process Build a complete Executive Information System Create ad hoc reports or perform account analysis within minutes Save financial user's time by combining reporting, account inquiry, and journal inquiry into one application; free up time for true business analysis Perform corporate consolidations with instant access to dynamic data Reduce external audit time by allowing easier, instant access to financial data with full drill down capabilities Reconcile accounts Print or spreadsheets quickly and easily from a single, central application

11 Spreadsheet Server Introduction Query / Query Designer Overview As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Query Designer allows users to build queries which are then used in Excel to seamlessly retrieve critical business data and return the data for use within a spreadsheet. When using queries in Spreadsheet Server, three components work in conjunction with each other: Query Designer, a visual tool, is used to design and maintain queries. Query Exchange, an online depository of queries, is used to download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. The Excel Add-In component allows the user to execute the Query Designer queries on a spreadsheet, returning dynamic business data. Access to each component is based upon the licensed features assigned to a user. Features and Benefits Retrieve dynamic data within the company's enterprise databases (including Microsoft Access, DSN system databases, IBM iseries, Oracle, Salesforce, SAP and Microsoft SQL Server) Build a query using system provided designer tool Import/export pre-configured queries from various sources, including Global's Query Exchange Execute a query on the fly to ensure data is presented as business needs dictate Simple file system for storing and listing queries in a tree structure, similar to Windows Explorer Use data from a spreadsheet as parameters for a query Easily create formulas in spreadsheets using system provided Build a Template and Formula Assistant Perform dynamic calculations with multi-level drill downs to view associated detail Copy and paste drill down data into spreadsheets Global Software, Inc.

12 4 1.3 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Distribution Manager Overview As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s Spreadsheet Server, Distribution Manager is a powerful tool used to automate document distribution via , print, or file archive. Distributing spreadsheets can be a very time-consuming and laborious task. Consider the following issues: A workbook has many worksheets but only select ones are to be distributed. A workbook has external references to other workbooks needed for calculating the proper figures, but linked sheets are not to be distributed. Worksheets to be distributed contain formulas derived from a specific Excel add-in (such as Spreadsheet Server) or from a special Excel macro. The recipients do not have the add-in or macro installed on their PC. Workbooks need to be encrypted to allow/disallow opening or altering of contents. Hours are spent organizing, assembling, calculating, copying and pasting worksheets every reporting cycle. Distribution Manager takes into account each of the above issues and provides users with an easy and time-saving solution. Distribution Manager assembles Distribution Controls directly in workbooks. The number of distribution entries is limited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. Once the distribution rows are created, users can visually see and manage "who gets what" from one worksheet.

13 Spreadsheet Server Introduction Spreadsheet Writeback Overview As an integral part of Global Software, Inc.'s suite of data analytical solutions, Spreadsheet Writeback is a powerful tool used to write data from an Excel spreadsheet to a database. Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Currently data may be written back to any generic table for which the user has write permissions or to an Oracle database via the Oracle public APIs. Generic Tables Writebacks: During the initial setup process, a database is identified to which to write the data. This database connection is assigned per worksheet, thus it is possible to assign a different database to each worksheet within a workbook. After the database connection is defined, the user selects the table to which to write the data and identifies the columns in the table to populate with data from the spreadsheet. A Writeback definition has a header row that defines the table name and table fields, plus two columns to hold the date and status of the last writeback. One or more Writeback definitions may reside on a worksheet. Once the Writeback definition is defined, data to be written to the database is entered on the spreadsheet. The number of Writeback rows is limited only by the number of rows in a spreadsheet. The text "SWB>" signifies that the row is to be written back. After the data is keyed on the spreadsheet, the Writeback may be run. When running Writebacks, the user may run an individual Writeback, all Writebacks for a selected worksheet, or all Writebacks for the entire workbook. In addition, the user may write all data rows or only selected data rows to the database. Oracle APIs Writebacks: When writing back to Oracle via an Oracle API, the process is similar to that stated above for a generic table but with various differences. Some of the differences include assigning the database connection to the individual writeback instead of the sheet, and using the text "SWBAPI>" to signify a writeback row. Global Software, Inc.

14 6 1.5 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Profile Scheduler Overview The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various jobs such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading local database files. Available Profile Types: Address Book Cache - caches the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the time required to load the address book. Distribution Manager - refreshes selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or distributes selected Distribution Manager workbooks. Note: Scheduling Distribution Manager with Profile Scheduler and Office 365 is currently NOT supported. Custom Table Loads - downloads tables and table data from a source database into a target database allowing for optimized calculation speeds. Load Local Database Files - downloads account balance information into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. This is an excellent option for producing Spreadsheet Server reports once books have been closed and the analytical tasks have been performed in real time. The time spent loading the local databases is greatly offset by the dramatically reduced spreadsheet calculation times. As Profile Scheduler works with the Microsoft Windows Task Scheduler, reference the chart below for required user right assignments: Profile Type Creating and manually running a Job Scheduling a Job Running a scheduled Job while logged on Running a scheduled Job while logged off -OR- while logged on and running a Job under another account other than the logged on account Address Book Cache, No special Custom Table Loads requirements or Load Local No special requirements No special requirements No special requirements Distribution Manager Administrator Privileges Administrator Privileges Not applicable No special requirements Note: To verify if a user is part of the Administrator group, from the desk top go to Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Computer Management. On the Computer Management panel in the tree view go to Local Users and Groups>Groups. Select Administrator and view the properties. Verify that the user is in the group or add the user to the group if necessary. Mapped drives used in any part of the Profile Scheduler process, including Distribution Manager (i.e. File Save Folder) or Spreadsheet Server (i.e. File Locations), must be defined on the Mapped Drives tab when running and scheduling a job for certain profile types.

15 Installation and Registration 2 Installation and Registration 2.1 Additional Components 7 REQUIRED COMPONENTS Application Configurator A single installation of the Application Configurator for Spreadsheet Server must be completed by the administrator, and each user must be established and assigned a valid license key in the Configurator prior to using Spreadsheet Server. Contact the security administrator for the network location of the security and connections file. Microsoft.Net Framework Microsoft.Net Framework is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. This component must be installed prior to running the Spreadsheet Server setup program. Microsoft Visual Studio Tools for Office Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. Microsoft Access Database Engine 2010 Microsoft Access Database Engine for 2010 Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. Microsoft Visual C Microsoft Visual C Redistributable is a prerequisite for Spreadsheet Server. If it is not installed, then the Spreadsheet Server setup program will force the install. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS Based upon the database type to which Spreadsheet Server and/or Query Designer is connecting to, additional software components may be required prior to processing. Contact your IT department to determine what is required to be installed. Data Source Name (DSN) Database From the desktop, select Start>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Data Sources (ODBC) to create the DSN. Global Software, Inc.

16 8 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 iseries DB2 Database Both the ODBC and the OLEDB Provider components of the IBM iseries Access for Windows (formerly named Client Access Express) must be installed onto each user's PC. Run the setup program within IBM iseries Access for Windows to determine that the ODBC and OLEDB Provider components are installed. Microsoft Access Database No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Access database (.mdb) file. Microsoft SQL Server Database No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to a SQL Server database, as the ODBC driver used is already loaded with Windows. Oracle Client No further software needs to be loaded to provide connectivity to an Oracle database, as Global provides a direct connection. However, if you desire to connect to the Oracle database via the Oracle Client ODBC provider, then the Oracle Client software must be installed on each user's PC. Within Oracle Client configure the local service name, and assign the appropriate host name and port number.

17 Installation and Registration 9 SAP Database To access a SAP database in Spreadsheet Server, SAP Netweaver 7.0 or higher must be installed. Disk space requirements on the server are negligible (less than 10 Meg). The SAP adapter is imported to the system via an SAP transport in the "/ZGLBSOFT/" reserved namespace. This is an SAP approved mechanism for third party software which ensures no standard/custom code is overwritten on the customer system. No additional servers or server hardware is required. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using DISTRIBUTION MANAGER Distributor Outlook Add-In For Excel 2010 (or above) users utilizing Outlook, Distributor Outlook Add-In is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of Distributor Outlook AddIn prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Server option. Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects For Excel 2007 users utilizing Outlook, Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects (alias CDO) is a prerequisite for Distribution Manager. If it is not installed, then the Distribution Manager Settings function will force the installation of CDO prior to allowing the user to select Microsoft Outlook Exchange as the Server option. OPTIONAL COMPONENTS when using PROFILE SCHEDULER Microsoft Command Line Utilities for SQL Server Microsoft Command Line Utilities for SQL Server is an optional component; however, when it is loaded on the same machine as Profile Scheduler then the Profile Scheduler component takes advantage of the tools in an effort to increase processing speed and performance. Global Software, Inc.

18 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Register Add-In During the install process the system automatically registers and initiates the Spreadsheet Server add-in for Excel. If for any reason Spreadsheet Server is not registered during installation, then it must be manually registered. In addition, if multiple users are using Spreadsheet Server on the same PC, then subsequent users must manually register the add-in. The registration process registers and initiates the add-in for Excel. Note: If the add-in is not registered on the PC, then Spreadsheet Server will not appear in the list of available add-ins for Excel. 1. From the desktop, click Start>All Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Register Add-In. The Register Spreadsheet Server Add-In panel appears. 2. Click OK to register the add-in. A panel appears indicating that the registration process is complete. 3. Click OK.

19 Installation and Registration Uninstall Process Generally it is not necessary to uninstall Spreadsheet Server prior to installing new versions. An uninstall should only be performed in order to completely remove the product from the PC. 1. Ensure that Excel is not open. 2. From the desktop, click Start>Control Panel>Add or Remove Programs -or- Programs and Features. 3. Select the Spreadsheet Server program and click Change/Remove -or- Uninstall. Global Software, Inc.

20 12 3 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Navigation Spreadsheet Server uses the following navigation methods for processing functions on an Excel spreadsheet. Each function is not always available from each method. Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see SS Ribbon) Spreadsheet Server Right Click Context Menu (see SS Right Click Context Menu) NAVIGATION TIPS: Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various paths available to access a function.

21 Navigation SS Ribbon After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon is added in Excel. Use the SS ribbon to access/process functions in the application. Menu Item Description Calculation Options Allows the user to change the calculation mode of Excel and specify when formulas are calculated. Recalc Recalculates all formulas on the worksheet. Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. recalculate formulas for workbook, worksheet or selection, etc.). Cache Opens the Local Cache panel or Global Cache panel, listing cached records (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. view cache records, clear the cache and recalculate -or- recalculate, clear buffer). Note: When using Local Cache, the Cache icon will be yellow. When using Global Cache, the Cache icon will be red when items are pending and green when all items are calculated/completed. Global Software, Inc.

22 14 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Menu Item Description Refresh Clears and rebuilds memory of all stored items. Click the down arrow to access additional functions for clearing and rebuilding memory for individual items (i.e. HSegments, queries, SAP T-Codes, segment lists). Generate Reports Generates detail reports for all GXE and GEXD formulas in the workbook (see Expand to Account Balances, Expand to Journals, and GEXD Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. all or selected GXEs, account detail report (see Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet), all or selected GEXDs. Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell and the default action assigned for the Drill Down button in the user's SS Settings: Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying account balances which make up the calculated GXL amount(s) (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances). Opens the Drill Down panel or a worksheet, displaying detail records for the specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula). Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query (see GEXS Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. drill down to panel or worksheet options (see Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) and Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc), summary drill down (see Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances) and related summary drill down options).

23 Navigation 15 Menu Item Description Hide Rows Hides any row in the workbook containing GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. hide zero rows for worksheet or workbook). Restore Rows Displays previously hidden rows in the workbook (see Hide Rows with Zero Balances). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. restore hidden zero rows for worksheet or workbook). Expand GL Row Expands the balances for the selected GXL formulas on a row into account details (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. expand row or all rows). Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. collapse row, or all rows on the worksheet or in the workbook). Formula Assistant Opens the Formula Assistant panel, allowing the user to maintain parameters for a formula (see Formula Assistant and Formula Assistant for Queries. Global Software, Inc.

24 16 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Menu Item Description Build a Template Opens the Build a Template panel, allowing the user to quickly create a template on a worksheet (see Build a Template and Build a Template for Queries). Click the down arrow to access short cuts to the appropriate Build a Template panel (i.e. General Ledger, Query, SAP Query (SQ00), SAP T-Code (see SAP Explorer). Note: The short cuts available are based upon the user's licensed features, the current General Ledger Type, the assignment of Quick Text to the current and/or Designer GL ledgers and/or to queries, and/or the assignment of T-Codes in the Configurator. Lookup Click the down arrow to access short cuts to open the Select Item panel with the values returned from the specified query, allowing the user to select values to be returned to the spreadsheet (see Execute Lookup without a GEXS Formula). Query Click the down arrow to access short cuts to favorite SAP T-Codes or queries, allowing the user to select a SAP T-Code and then select the desired execution variant on the SAP T-Codes pane -or- to select a query and then enter parameters on the Query pane for executing details for the selected SAP T-Code or query (see Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXD Formula and Execute Query without a GEXD Formula). Note: The short cuts available are based upon the user's licensed features, the Available on Ribbon option setting for queries, the assignment of T-Codes in the Configurator, and the pinning of T-Codes on the SAP Ledger Specifics Settings panel. Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid fields or hierarchy values for each account segment.

25 Navigation Menu Item 17 Description Tools: Data Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validation list for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation). Fix Broken Links Corrects all broken links to the.xll in the workbook. Select Responsibility For Oracle ledgers only, identifies the default responsibility for GXL formulas, unless the value is overridden in the formula. This value is set when an Oracle Default Responsibility is selected during sign on (see Oracle Sign On). Click the displayed responsibility name to change the value. Upgrade Workbook Opens the Upgrade Workbook Options panel, allowing the user to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas. Disconnect All Open Connections Disconnects all open connections for Spreadsheet Server and queries. View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy log entries, and or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Click the down arrow to access additional functions (i.e. view log, clear log, or turn enhanced logging on/off). Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing, to access the Log Viewer or to access the online user manual (see SS Settings). Enabled / Disabled Displays the current status. Click to toggle -or- click the down arrow to access individual Enable and Disable options (see Sign on). Global Software, Inc.

26 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 SS Right Click Context Menu After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Spreadsheet Server (SS) right click context menu is added in the Cell menu for the Normal and Page Layout views in Excel. Use the SS right click context menu to access/process various functions within the application. Menu Item Description Clear Cache and Re-Calc Selected Cells Clears cache and recalculates the formula for the selected cells on the worksheet (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Drill Down Based upon the formula in the current active cell: Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying account balances which make up the calculated amount (see Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances and Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances). Opens the Drill Down panel, displaying detail records for the specified query (see GEXQ Formula and GEXI Formula). Opens the Select Item panel, displaying values for the associated query (see GEXS Formula). Summary Drill Down Allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping or summarizing accounts when displaying account balances which make up the single GXL value (see Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances). Expand GL Row Expands the balances for the selected GXL formulas on a row into account details (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). Collapse GL Row Removes the expanded account detail rows in the selected section (see Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula). List Accounts Opens the List Accounts panel, listing the accounts used in the GXL formula (see List Accounts for a GXL Formula) or allowing the user to generate a list of existing accounts. Locate Segment Opens the Locate A Segment panel, displaying the valid fields or hierarchy values for each account segment. Validation Opens the Data Validation panel, allowing the user to create a validation list for a specific cell in Excel (see SS Validation). Generate This Detail Report (GXE) Generates a detail report for the selected GXE formula (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Generate This Detail Report (GEXD) Executes the selected GEXD formula (see GEXD Formula).

27 Sign On 4 19 Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box. 4. Click Login or OK. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

28 20 5 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Control Panel The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel is a central panel from which multiple functions can be accessed from outside the standard Excel interface. These same functions may also be accessed from the Spreadsheet Server ribbon within Excel. For example, from the Control Panel: GL reporting users may view account balances for a selected account string, and may subsequently drill down to the journals and journal entry lines which make up the balance. Query users may view the results of an GEXQ formula, and may also drill down to supporting detail. To Access the Control Panel: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Spreadsheet Server Control Panel. The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: 2. Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, then click Login or OK. The Spreadsheet Server Control Panel appears.

29 Control Panel Some of the fields on the GL Balances tab will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel GL Balances tab, or to access other functions. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information. Field Description Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Specify the reporting year. Format Displays PER, indicating the time range for which to retrieve data. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts Designer GL Definition Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Account String Key the value for each segment in the account string for the GXL formula or click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. Segments will vary based upon the selected ledger. Values may be single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). GL Balances 0-15 Displays the calculated period balances for the selected account string. Function Description Generate - GXL Calculates period balances for the selected account string, and subsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting journals. Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/or maintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security). Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Accesses the online user manual. Help Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

30 22 Spreadsheet Server - Version To display balances for the account string, from the ribbon select Generate. Balances are displayed in Period 0 to 15 fields. 5. To view account balances, click the corresponding Drill button ( to Detailed Account Balances). 6. Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Control Panel - Query tab, or to access other functions. Field Query Name ). The Drill Down panel appears (see Drill Down Description When the query resides in the File System, click the Open From File button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed. When the query resides in Query Exchange, click the Search Online button ( ) to navigate to and select the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have been specified in the selected query definition. Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula.

31 Control Panel Field 23 Description Value Specify the value (i.e. single value, a wildcard, list, range, or segment list) to be used when generating the query results. Results Displays the calculated value for the selected query. Function Description Generate - GEXQ Calculates a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query in the Results field, and subsequently allows for drilling down to the supporting detail (see GEXQ Formulas). Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). Settings Opens the Spreadsheet Server Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing (see SS Settings). Help Accesses the online user manual. 7. To display the result for the specified query, from the ribbon select Generate. The calculated value displays in the Results field. 8. To view supporting detail, click the corresponding Drill button ( Formulas). Global Software, Inc. ). The Drill Down panel appears (see GEXQ

32 24 6 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 SS Settings Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the options define processing for all users on the PC; however, various options (auto-start, display tool tips, enhanced logging, and expand rows) are defined for each individual user. Settings for General Ledger Type, and Segment Lists, Ad Hocs Queries, Designer GL Definitions and EDQ Files locations may be set and/or overridden based upon parameters defined in Application Settings in the Configurator. Various Settings panels are conditional and based upon the user's licensed features. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel.

33 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description General Options: General Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the General Ledger type being used. When not licensed to use the General Ledger feature, the value is set to "None." Note: After a selection is made, the system automatically navigates to the associated ledger specific panel. Label Language Click the down arrow and select the language to be used to display labels on various panels (only applies to Build a Template, Formula Assistant, SS ribbon, and right click context menu). Connection Options: iseries/dsn/sqlserver/oracle Specify the connection protocol to be used to connect to the host system. Network Security & Connections Files Click the Browse button and select the location of the Security and Connections File as specified in the Configurator. This function is password protected. Note: When in demo mode, select the desired security and connections file in order to switch to standard mode. Available Environments Specify the environment to be used for processing. This section only appears when the Network Security and Connection Files location is on the network and an available training environment exists. Standard Options: Start Automatically When Excel Starts If selected, Spreadsheet Server automatically starts each time Excel is started. Otherwise, Spreadsheet Server must be manually started each time Excel is started. Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see SS View Log). Override List Separator With Specify the character to use to as the list separator in Excel formulas and in data validation lists. Generally this value should be a comma unless using different regional settings. Contact Global for more information. Override Exclusion Character With Specify the character to use to indicate when to exclude a value. The character may not contain %, ^, *, -, =, [, ],, ;,,,. or equal the Override List Separator With field value. SQL Timeout Specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed for a GXL query to run on the host system. Note: This does not mean that after the specified time the query will stop running, but if the data optimizer anticipates that the query will tak e longer than the specified time it will immediately issue a message. Delimiter for Separating From/ To Values in a Range Specify the delimiter for separating from/to values in a range. This defaults to a period and should only be changed if periods exist in the account segment values or query data. This setting applies to ranges used in Spreadsheet Server, Query and Query Designer components. Display Tooltips If selected, tool tips display on various Spreadsheet Server panels (only applies to Spreadsheet Server Settings, Build a Template, Formula Assistant, and SAP T-Codes Excel panes). Global Software, Inc.

34 26 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Drill Down Options: Drill Down Specify when displaying drill down results on a panel whether to use a single dialog panel per drill down or whether subsequent drill downs appear on a different tab within the same panel. SSRibbon Drill Down Button Default Action Specify whether the Drill Down button on the SS ribbon displays results on a panel or pushes results to a worksheet. Drill Down to Worksheet Goes Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to create a To new worksheet each time or to reuse the same drill down worksheet. Drill Down to Worksheet Data Goes To Specify when pushing drill down results to a worksheet whether to place the drill down down in a table, range or cell. Cache: Cache Type Click the down arrow and select whether to use Local, Global Cache, or Global Cache with Redis Technology. Additional options are available based upon the cache type selected (see View/Refresh Local Cache or View/Refresh Global Cache). Note: Additional component(s) must be installed to implement either the Global Cache or Global Cache with Redis Technology options. Contact Global for more information. Global Cache URL Specify the URL for the global cache. Redis Server / Database ID / Password Specify the server, database ID and password associated with the Redis database. Use SmartCache Buffer If selected, balances from different periods with the same account key may be returned from an internal buffer to speed up processing. When selected, the option, Clear Buffer, appears in the Cache drop down list on the SS ribbon, allowing the user to clear the internal SmartCache buffer. Use Shared Cache If selected, shared user data in the cache is used for processing. If not selected, cache records generated by the user are used for processing and user security remains intact. Auto Refresh Pending Items If selected, any items in the cache which are pending will refresh and continue to process. If not selected, any formulas which were pending will continue to display 'Pending' in the workbook until manually refreshed to bring in a value. Button Function Demo Allows the user to switch from standard to demo mode. The button only appears when the user is in standard mode. View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy log entries, and or clear the log file (see SS View Log). Maintain Segment Lists Opens the Segment List Maintenance panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain segment lists (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists).

35 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the GL Reporting panel, or to access other functions. Field Description GL Reporting Options: Drill Down: Include Zero If selected, accounts with activity but zero balances are included on the Balance Accounts with Activity account balances drill down panel, and in the expand row and GXE results. Summary Drill Down: Prompt for Processing Criteria If selected, a prompt panel appears when the Summary Drill Down function is selected allowing the user to define processing criteria; otherwise, default selection criteria is used. GXL: Insert Trailing Dash If selected, a dash is appended at the end of the account string. Template: Default Currency Specify the currency value to default when using Build a Template. GXE: Last Processing Column Specify the last column GXE formulas will process. Delimiter for Separating Account Segments Specify the delimiter for separating account segments. Expand GL Row Function Expands Detail Rows Specify whether the Expand GL Row function expands detail rows up or down. Expand GL Row: Convert null segment values to Specify whether the Expand GL Row function converts null account segment values to an asterisk (*) or an empty cell. Global Software, Inc.

36 28 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Button Function Maintain Accounts Profile Opens the Accounts Profile panel, allowing the user to view and/or maintain the list of account strings to which they have access authority (see Account Security). Refresh Cached Segment Values Refreshes cached GL account segment values. 4. Ledger Specific panels are used to maintain criteria specific to the ledger. Use the following links to access ledger specific settings information. Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

37 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the Quarters panel. Field Description Accounting Quarter Periods: Monthly Period Quarters Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each of the four quarters. These quarters are referenced in the GXL formula when using the QTR format. Daily Period Quarters Specify the starting/ending period numbers for each quarter up to twelve quarters. These quarters are referenced in the GXL formula when using the DQTR format. Global Software, Inc.

38 30 6. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Ad Hoc Queries panel. Field Description Ad Hoc Queries: Filter by GL If selected, only ad hoc queries associated with the selected ledger are listed on the panel and are included in the list of ad hoc queries in the drill down feature. De-select to list all available ad hoc queries. SQL is Read Only If selected, ad hoc queries may not be created, edited, copied or deleted. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Button Function Test Runs the selected ad hoc query and displays the results in a Drill Down panel.

39 SS Settings Use the table to enter data on the Query panel. Field Description Query Options: Limit GEXD to 64K Rows/ Sheet If selected, the output of a GEXD formula is limited to 64,000 rows per sheet and the query terminates when the output exceeds the limit. Note: For Excel 2003 and prior users, it is suggested to select this option. For Excel 2007 (.xlsx) users, it is suggested to not select this option to tak e advantage of the more than a million rows available. Query Timeout Specify the maximum time (in seconds) allowed for a query (EDQ formulas) to run on the host system. Note: This does not mean that after the specified time the query will stop running, but if the data optimizer anticipates that the query will tak e longer than the specified time it will immediately issue a message. Global Software, Inc.

40 32 8. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Writeback panel. Field Description Writeback Options: Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see SWB View Log). Filter Writeback Selections on If selected, the Select Worksheet drop down list on Writeback panels only Writeback Panels by Type displays sheets containing writebacks for the selected writeback type (i.e. Oracle API vs. Generic Tables) being processed. To optimize performance and reduce unnecessary filtering, Global recommends setting this option only if multiple writeback types are processed in a workbook. Oracle API Options: Use Cached API Lists If selected, Oracle APIs are retrieved from a cached list to speed up the load time of APIs on the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel. When Generating API Loader... Specify whether the Date and Status columns are inserted to the far left or far right of the writeback data grid when the API Loader sheet is generated.

41 SS Settings Field 33 Description Generic Options: When Generating Writeback Definition... Specify whether the Date and Status columns are inserted to the far left or far right of the writeback data grid when the writeback definition is generated. Button Description View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see SWB View Log). Global Software, Inc.

42 34 9. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Writeback Template panel. Note: A user's ability to create/maintain writeback templates is determined by an option in User settings in the Configurator. Field Description Writeback Template: Template Name Specify the template name. Builder Sheet Name Specify the prefix name to be assigned to Builder sheets when the template is used. Do not use special characters in the name. If left blank, the value defaults to Builder. When the template is processed the system adds a suffix of _API-n (where n is a sequence number) to the name. Loader Sheet Name Specify the prefix name to be assigned to Loader sheets when the template is used. Do not use special characters in the name. If left blank, the value defaults to Loader. When the template is processed the system adds a sequence number to the name. Consolidate Loader Sheets If selected, a single Loader sheet is created containing all API Loaders for the template; otherwise one Loader sheet is create per API Loader. Configuration Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be used by the template to connect to the database.

43 SS Settings Field 35 Description API List Displays a list of the APIs for this template. To add an API to the list, click the Add button. The Select Oracle Public API panel appears, allowing the user to select the API to be added to the list. Note: The Select Oracle Public API panel is similar to the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, with the exception that unrelated fields have been removed or disabled. See Oracle APIs - Build a Template and Single API Method for basic steps for selecting an API. To display parameters for an API, select the API in the window. The parameters are displayed in the Parameter List window to the right. To reorder APIs in the list, select the API in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the selected API up or down in the list. To remove an API from the list, select the API in the window, and click the delete button ( ) button. Omit API-Level Validation If selected, indicates to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected API during writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios in which field dependencies exist between related P_VALIDATE APIs being processed together. This option only appears when the selected API contains the P_VALIDATE parameter. Parameter List Displays a list of parameters for the selected API. To include a parameter in the API query, select the Included check box, otherwise deselect the option. Select or deselect the Included check box in the header to select or deselect the option for all parameters. To assign a user-defined name to be displayed on the Builder Sheet and Loader Sheet for a parameter, key the value in the Display Name field. To preset the Set As Default flag for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, select the Set As Default check box. Select or deselect the Set As Default check box in the header to select or deselect the option for all parameters. To preset the API Field Default Value for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, key the value in the Data Value field. To populate a cell in the grid with a value from a query, click the Lookup button, navigate to and select the desired query, select the desired value and click Insert Selected Value(s). The system returns the value from the first column to the selected cell. Button Description New Template Clears fields and resets default field values on the panel, allowing the user to start fresh to enter data for creating a new template. Browse for Template Open Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select a writeback template. Global Software, Inc.

44 36 Spreadsheet Server - Version The File Locations panel displays the location of various files used in the product. File locations which are highlighted have been preloaded based upon settings in the Configurator. Use the table to enter data on the File Locations panel. Field Description File Locations: Shared Documents For Administrators in Citrix environments only, use the Browse button to select the location to which to move the basic folders. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Segment Lists Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Segment Lists database and Segment Mapping objects. This may be a local or network drive. Local Cache Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the local cache database. Ad Hoc Queries Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the ad hoc queries, this folder should be reserved for ad hoc queries only. PC Local Database For BPCS and Data Warehouse ledgers only, key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the local.mbd database. This location may also be updated from the Load Local PC Database or the Load Data Warehouse from GL panels.

45 SS Settings Field 37 Description Budget Manager Balances For BPCS, Infinium and JDE ledgers only, key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the budget balances when using Global's Budget Manager application. Designer GL Definitions Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Designer GL definitions. Drill Down Layouts Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the userdefined drill down grid layouts. EDQ Files Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the EDQ query files. Writeback APIs Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Writeback APIs. Writeback Templates Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the Writeback Templates. 11. The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Spreadsheet Server. To this information to the helpdesk, click the button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the contents of this panel in the body of the . Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. Global Software, Inc.

46 38 Spreadsheet Server - Version The Performance panel displays various performance counts and statistics with respect to how the product is processing. Use the table to enter data on the Performance panel, or to access other functions. Field Description SQL Execution Threshold Specify the time limit (in seconds) for which to create an entry in the error log when a SQL statement exceeds the threshold specified. Button Function Reset Statistics Clears the performance statistic values, thus allowing counts and statistics to start accumulating again. Opens a new Outlook panel with system information and performance data in the body of the . Modify the address and/ or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button.

47 SS Settings The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online user manual. 14. Click OK. The system writes the changes made on the current panel and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

48 40 7 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 GL Reporting Spreadsheet Server retrieves financial data from the General Ledger into Excel using the following formulas: Formula Description GXL Returns an account balance (see GXL Formula for Account Values and see links below to access ledger specific GXL information). GXD Returns an account segment or account string description (see links below to access ledger specific GXD information). GXE Explodes summary data line into detail data lines (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). GXC Customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of new formulas. SSLDESC Returns a segment list description (see SSLDESC Formula). GXSALES For JDE ledgers only, returns sales totals based upon sales criteria (see JDE GXSALES). Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See Query for query related formulas. These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (see Formula Assistant). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

49 GL Reporting Build a Template Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This tool populates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters and account segment values as provided by the user. The tool inserts a GXL or GXE formula using the parameters and account segment values. Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. Note: See Build a Template for Queries for query related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the last used formula. Nav Tip: The Build a Template - GXL panel may be accessed and pre-populated by selecting from the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger and then selecting the desired ledger. Only ledgers with a Quick Text defined on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics will be available for selection. 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

50 42 3. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Some fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Build a Template GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information. Field Description GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for Account Values). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet name which will receive the template. Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts Ledger Specific Processing Options These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - FSG Templates and Convert Missing Values to Parent Hierarchies Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. Available Designer GL Definitions Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Line Description Specify a description for the account or group of accounts specified. Clear Worksheet / Do Not Clear Worksheet / Shift Worksheet Data Specify when inserting data whether to clear all cell data on the target worksheet, to not clear cell data on the target worksheet, or to insert the GXL formula in the target cell and then to insert the ledger and segment specific data to newly inserted columns and rows to the top and to the left of the existing worksheet data (see Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet and Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data). Insert Column Data Only This option is enabled after data has been inserted using the Insert icon on the toolbar. If selected, an additional column of parameters is inserted (see Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only). Skip a Row If selected, an additional row is inserted between the last column parameter and the account segment title row. Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed.

51 GL Reporting 43 Field Description Account Segments: If necessary, use the scroll bar to access additional account segments. Display/Use If selected, the account segment is included in the formula. Note: Segments may only be excluded from the bottom up. Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determines if the account segment will be located in the template parameters column or by default, on the template account segment row. Description Specify the description to be used as the account segment title. Value Specify the value to default on the template for the account segment or click the ellipse button to select from a list of valid segment values. The value may be a single value, mask, segment list, hierarchy field or the first value in a range (see Account Segment Syntax). Range Thru Value If applicable, select the check box and specify the ending range value for the account segment. Use the following links to access ledger specific Build a Template - GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

52 44 4. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GXE panel. Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Field Description GXE: Fills detail account balances or journal details into the specified worksheet (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template Source Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas to be expanded and onto which to insert the GXE formula. Target Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. When using Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation, the system hard codes to use the same value assigned to Part 1. Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Headings Click the down arrow and select whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Autofit Click the down arrow and select whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Clear Sheet Click the down arrow and select whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand to Journals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, click the down arrow and select the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Filter by GL If selected, the queries listed in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down list are limited to the ledger specified in the associated field. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. GL for Filtering (no label) If the Filter by GL option is selected, click the down arrow and select the ledger for which to list ad hoc queries in the Journals Ad Hoc Query drop down list. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers.

53 GL Reporting Field Summarize Balance Level 45 Description If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balances at the account level enter '3' (third account segment). Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row will override this value. In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDE GXECC formula. 5. Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third account segment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company and grand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journals in the work book, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values, and the formula to the selected worksheet, increments Period and Starting Column/Row values for the next GXL formula, and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes the panel. Cancel/Close (button) -- closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

54 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Build a Template GXL Using Clear / Do Not Clear Worksheet The following example demonstrates using the Clear Worksheet and/or the Do Not Clear Worksheet options when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. 1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data. 3. Click the Insert button at the bottom of the panel. The panel closes and the template is generated.

55 GL Reporting Build a Template GXL Using Insert Column Data Only The following example demonstrates using the Insert Column Data Only option when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. This option is used to insert multiple columns onto a single worksheet. 1. From an open worksheet in Excel, from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Key the appropriate ledger parameters and account segment data. 3. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The template is generated, but the panel remains open and the Period, Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented, and the Insert Column Data Only check box is selected. 4. Key any necessary changes to the ledger parameters. 5. Click the Insert icon on the toolbar. The column data and GXL formula are added to the template, and the Period, Starting Column and Starting Row values are incremented. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all desired columns are added. 7. Click the Close button to close the panel. Global Software, Inc.

56 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Build a Template GXL Using Shift Worksheet Data The following example demonstrates using the Shift Worksheet Data option when processing a GXL formula from the Build a Template function. This option is used to insert the required rows and columns used for a GXL formula into an existing non-spreadsheet Server worksheet. 1. Start with an existing non-spreadsheet Server worksheet in Excel. Select the first cell to be populated with a formula (i.e. B4 in the spreadsheet below), then from the SS Ribbon select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears. 2. Select the option Shift Worksheet Data. The Starting Column and Starting Row fields are modified to display the cell previously selected on the worksheet. 3. Enter the appropriate values on the Build a Template panel. 4. Click the Insert icon -or- button. The panel closes and the column and row parameters, and formula are added to the existing worksheet.

57 GL Reporting Formula Assistant The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features and the selected ledger. Note: See JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES for JDE ledger specific GXSALES formula. See Formula Assistant for Queries for query related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL panel -or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears. 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual formula parameters. However, if literal values are k eyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes ("). Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references: On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field. Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up. On the worksheet, select the desired cell. Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field. Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference. Global Software, Inc.

58 50 3. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Some fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant GXL panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXL information. Field Description GXL: Returns a single balance from the ledger (see GXL Formula for Account Values). Note: This section assumes that the parameters will be laid out top down in a single column. Therefore, when entering a cell reference in the first field and moving to the next field, the system will populate the other fields sequentially thru the Period field. Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type Year Specify the reporting year. Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Basic valid formats are PER, QTR, DTQR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats. Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Data These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If selected, the corresponding option and associated value is included in the formula. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 Data = Currency, Translated, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), Translated Flag, and Summary Accts Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed. Account Segments: Specify the cells containing the required account segments. This area assumes that the account segments will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first account segment cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

59 GL Reporting Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXE panel. Note: Optionally use Formula Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Field Description GXE: Fills detail balances into the specified worksheet (see Expand to Account Balances and Expand to Journals). Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. Target Worksheet Specify the name of the new or existing worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. Source Detail Row Specify the row number on the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. When using Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation, the system hard codes to use the same value assigned to Part 1. Target Table, Range, or Row Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Headings Specify whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Autofit Specify whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Global Software, Inc.

60 52 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Clear Sheet Specify whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. Journals Only Column Specify the column for which to generate journal detail (see Expand to Journals). Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, specify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Summarize Balance Level If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. To summarize balances at the account level enter '3' (third account segment). Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row will override this value. In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. This replicates the legacy SSJDE GXECC formula. Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Ex: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account. Enter a '3' (third account segment) to generate subtotals at the account, department, company and grand total level. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse, or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table Click the down arrow and select whether or not to place expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is utilized, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This function is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journals in the work book, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors.

61 GL Reporting Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXC panel. Note: This panel is hidden when ad hoc processing is disabled via a setting in the Configurator. Field Description GXC: Used to specify the values for a customized formula. Contact Global for configuration of the new formula. Query Click the down arrow and select the custom ad hoc query to be used for the customized formula. Parm Specify the appropriate parameters for the customized formula. Field values will vary based upon the requirements for the customized formula. Global Software, Inc.

62 54 6. Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Fields on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the table as an overview for entering data on the Formula Assistant - GXD panel. Links are available at the bottom of the table to access ledger specific GXD information. Field Description GXD: Displays the description for an account segment or account string. Parms These headers and field values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Parms = Segment Num, Value and Ledger. Account Segments: May or may not be applicable for the GXD formula. Use the following links to access ledger specific GXD information: 7. Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL (N/A) JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson (N/A) SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in the Results Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet and closes the panel. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

63 GL Reporting GXL Formula for Account Values Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. Parameters in the GXL formula will vary based upon the selected ledger; however, basic processing is the same for all ledgers. Use the following as an overview for the GXL formula. Links are available at the bottom to access ledger specific GXL information. Syntax: =GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 1 = Balance Type. Key 2 Value will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. Ex: Oracle - Key 2 = Budget/En Type. Key 3 Literals and values will vary based upon requirements for the selected ledger. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Ex: Oracle - Key 3 = Translated, Currency, Ledger (a.k.a. Book), and Summary Accts. Year Year identifier. Format Basic valid formats are listed below; however, some ledgers may have other valid formats: PER Activity for a selected period or range of periods QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account number. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Use the following links to access ledger specific GXL information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

64 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Account Segment Syntax For parameters that allow a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group) field syntax examples are listed below: Criteria Type Syntax Results Single Value 8000 Retrieves value 8000 Mask (wildcard) 85* -or- 85** (see Note 1) Retrieves values starting with 85 Mask (wildcard) for All Values * Retrieves all values Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value 8*00 -or- 8_00 Retrieves values 8x00, where x is any character (i.e. 8100, 8200, 8300,...) Range (see Note 2) Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599 Blank Values (see Note 3) BLANK Retrieves all blank values. Non Blank Values (see Note 3) NOTBLANK Retrieves all non blank values. Note 1: JDE ledgers are case sensitive when specifying characters for a segment value. SAP ledgers must use 85** syntax -- one asterisk (*) for each digit/character being masked. Note 2: The range delimiter may be defined in the user's SS Settings. Note 3: BLANK and NOTBLANK values only apply to Infinium, JDE, and SAP special ledgers. Value List: A list of values may be entered for an account segment. The list of values may include single values, a range of values, a mask (wildcard) value, segment lists, hierarchy fields, or an excluded value (indicated by inserting '/' prior to the value). Enclose the value list in square brackets [ ] and use a comma (,) to separate values in the list. Criteria Type Syntax Results Value List - Single Values [8000,8250,8370] Retrieves values 8000, 8250 and 8370 Value List - Range & Exclude Value [ ,/8375] Retrieves values 8000 thru 8599, excluding 8375 Note: The range delimiter, list separator and exclusion characters may be defined in the user's SS Settings. Segment Lists and Hierarchy Values: Criteria Type Syntax Results Segment List ^CASH Retrieves all values in CASH segment list Hierarchy Value ^^1234 Retrieves all values in group 1234 Note: SAP ledgers use a single caret (^) to identify SAP master data hierarchy sets and a double caret (^^) to identify other SAP set names. If a master data hierarchy set and segment list are assigned the same name, the calculation uses the hierarchy Fields: The syntax for field (where aaa is the alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator), and bbb is the field value). The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. field may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list. Criteria Type Syntax Field - Single Retrieves myfield value Field - using a Value Retrieves myfield value 2000 and Field - in a Value List [100,@myfield:2000,600] Retrieves value 100 or 600 or myfield value 2000 Note: If necessary, may enter table qualifier (syntax Click the link to go to a related topic: Create/Maintain Segment Lists and Locate Segment.

65 GL Reporting List Accounts for a GXL Formula This feature allows for listing account numbers which will be used in the calculation of a GXL formula. Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers. 1. Select the desired cell that contains the GXL formula in question, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts window appears. 2. Review the accounts listed in the grid to ensure the formula is retrieving the appropriate accounts. 3. To modify the list of accounts being displayed on the List Accounts window, alter the value in the Filter field and click the List Accounts button. Note: Modifying the filter does not change the account segment values in the spreadsheet cell being referenced by the GXL formula. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records. Global Software, Inc.

66 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Expand/Collapse Row for a GXL Formula The Expand GL Row feature allows the user to expand the balances for GXLs on a single row or for all GXLs on the worksheet into individual account details. During the process the system also expands data and/or formulas in the columns to the right or left of the GXL formulas. This process is similar to the GXE formula, but expands into additional rows on the current worksheet instead of to another designated workbook location. A maximum of 80 columns may be expanded. The detail rows can expand up or down, and convert null segment values to an asterisk or empty cell based upon options in the user's SS Settings. Note: For the Expand option to function properly, all parameters must be in a column and at least one account segment must be on the row, and a description field should follow the last account segment on the row -or- a blank column should exist between the last account segment and the GXL formula. When the original GXL contains field, the expanded rows display the appropriate account segment and field value; however, calculated amounts may be overstated and may not foot to the original GXL calculated amount. When a SUM formula uses a range to reference cells to be totaled, this calculation will be incorrect when expand GL rows, whether expanding up or down. To Expand a Single GL Row: 1. On the desired row to be expanded, select any cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Expand GL Row -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Expand GL Row. The system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for the selected GXL(s). The expanded data appears in blue italics. Selected GXL Formulas

67 GL Reporting 59 Expanded Row Results To Expand All GL Rows: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Expand GL Row>Expand All GL Rows. The system adds additional rows to the spreadsheet listing the account details for all GXLs on the worksheet. The expanded data appears in blue italics. To Collapse GL Rows for a Single Expansion: 1. Select any cell within the expanded rows section, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Collapse GL Row. The system removes the expanded GL rows in the selected section. To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions on the Worksheet: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows (Worksheet). The system removes all expanded GL rows on the worksheet. To Collapse GL Rows for All Expansions in the Workbook: 1. Select any cell on the worksheet, then from the SS Ribbon select Collapse GL Row>Collapse All GL Rows (Workbook). The system removes all expanded GL rows in the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

68 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Locate Segment The Locate Segment function is used to display a list of valid account segment fields (as defined in the Configurator), or hierarchy values (a.k.a. parent groups) for each account segment, and to enable the user to insert a selected value to the current active cell in Excel. fields and ledger specific hierarchy values may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the field or hierarchy value. field or hierarchy value may be used alone or embedded in a bracketed value list. The syntax for field (where aaa is the alias or field name, and bbb is the field value), or if necessary may enter a table qualifier (syntax The field value specified may be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list. Insert two carets symbols (^^) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula for the system to recognize the hierarchy value. 1. Select the cell to contain the segment value, then from the SS Ribbon select Locate Segment -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Locate Segment. The Locate A Segment panel appears. Note: The first time the Locate Segment function is accessed the system loads and caches VSegments. A message and progress bar appear indicating that this process may tak e a few moments. 2. To toggle between displaying a list of segment fields, or hierarchy values, select the Fields, or Hierarchy radio button. Note: For Data Warehouse and SAP ledgers, the Value and Hierarchy options are not applicable. For Designer GL ledgers, the Hierarchy option is disabled when HSegments are not preloaded.

69 GL Reporting To filter for segment values or hierarchy values for a specific segment, select the desired segment(s) in the Include Segments list. The system displays only the segment or hierarchy values for the selected segment(s). This feature does not apply when fields. 4. To filter the segment fields, or hierarchy values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. 5. To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, click the column heading a second time. 6. To copy the list of values currently displayed in the list, click the Copy Segment Lists to Clipboard toolbar icon. 7. To insert a value to the current cell process one of the following: For a Value or Hierarchy: Double click the desired value in the list -or- select the value and click the Insert button. The value is inserted and the panel closes. Select the desired value in the list and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The value is inserted and the panel remains open. For Field: Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), double click the desired alias in the list -or- select the alias and click the Insert button. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel closes. Key the appropriate value (may be a single value, mask, range, value list or segment list), select the alias and click the Insert to Current Cell toolbar icon. The alias and assigned value is inserted and the panel remains open. Global Software, Inc.

70 62 Spreadsheet Server - Version Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists Create/Maintain Segment Lists Spreadsheet Server Segment Lists are used to create a hierarchy of individual segments which can be used in a GXL formula. A segment list may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired segment list name. A caret symbol (^) must be inserted prior to the segment list name in the formula for the system to recognize the segment list. A user's ability to create/maintain segment lists is determined by an option in User settings in the Configurator. To Create a New Segment List: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Segment Lists. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GL Balances or Query tabs -or- by selecting the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel. 2. To create a new segment list, enter a segment list name (no blank spaces or special characters), description, and optional user-defined group name, then click the Add List toolbar icon ( Segment List grid. ). The segment list is added to the

71 GL Reporting Use the table to enter data in the Segment List Value section on the Segment List Maintenance panel. Field Description And/Or Specify the transition logic between the values or groups, thus indicating whether or not the values in the grouping must meet both criteria (AND) or only meet one criteria (OR) to be included in the segment list. Note: The And/Or selection criteria is ignored for the first list value. Group Specify an ID number for grouping different lines in the list together. The value defaults to Field Alias If desired, click the down arrow and select the alias, for field as defined in the Configurator, to be used in the segment list. Comparison Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the value. Valid values are Between, Equal, Like, Not Between, Not Equal and Not Like. Use Between and Not Between when specifying a range, and Like and Not Like when using a mask (wildcard). Note: The system modifies the comparison value based upon the criteria entered in the Value field. Note: May not exclude (i.e. Not Equal) a segment list. Value Specify the value for the criteria. The value may be a segment value, mask (wildcard), range, existing segment list (nesting), full or partial account string, category code, user field value or field value. Note: For Infinium, JDE, and SAP special ledgers only, the literals BLANK and NONBLANK are valid values. 4. Click the Add Value icon ( ). The value criteria is added to the Segment List Value grid. 5. Once the segment list is complete, click X. The panel closes. To Maintain an Existing Segment List: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Segment Lists. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Segment Lists button on the Control Panel - GL Balances or Query tabs -or- the Maintain Segment Lists button on the Spreadsheet Server Settings General panel. 2. To sort the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, click the desired column header. To re-sort in descending order, click the desired column header a second time. 3. To filter the segment lists or segment list values in the grid, enter the selection criteria into the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. 4. To modify an existing segment list, select the list and key over the description, group name and/or update the segment list values as necessary. 5. To move a segment list value up or down in the grid, select the list, then select the value and click the appropriate Up or Down arrow icon ( Global Software, Inc. or ).

72 64 Spreadsheet Server - Version To remove a segment list value, select the list, then select the value in the grid and click the Remove Value icon ( ). 7. To copy a segment list, select the list and click the Copy List toolbar icon ( ). The Copy Segment List panel appears. Enter the name to be assigned to the new segment list and click OK. 8. To delete a segment list, select the list and click the Remove List toolbar icon ( 9. To paste a segment list(s) to the active cell on the spreadsheet, select the desired segment list(s) and click the ). Insert List toolbar icon ( ). To select a single segment list -- select the list. To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows. To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last list in the range. Note: If the active cell already contains a value, then the newly selected segment list(s) is added and the values in the active cell are formatted into a value list. If the active cell contains a mask (i.e. *), then the newly selected segment list(s) replaces the previous mask. 10. To copy all segment lists (name, description, group name and values) to the clipboard, click the Copy Lists toolbar icon ( ). The data may then be pasted into Excel, Notepad, Word, etc. for review and/or printing. 11. To lock a segment list(s), select the desired segment list(s) and click the Lock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. Locking the segment list allows other users to access the segment list but prevents changes from being made. To select a single segment list -- select the list. To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows. To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last list in the range. 12. To unlock a segment list(s), select the list(s) and click the Unlock toolbar icon ( ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter a valid password and click OK. To select a single segment list -- select the list. To select multiple segment lists -- press and hold the Ctrl key as lists are selected on the grid rows. To select multiple segment lists in a range -- select the first list in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last list in the range. Note: In the event the individual required passwords are lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password. 13. To unlock all segment lists, click the Unlock All toolbar icon ( override password and click OK. ). The Password dialog box appears. Enter the 14. To purge balances in the cache file for a segment list, select the list and click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ). This action may be used when using local cache mode if a segment list is deleted or if list values are altered.

73 GL Reporting To import segment lists from an ad hoc, Excel spreadsheet or a segment list.mdb file, click the Import Lists toolbar icon ( ). The Segment List Import panel appears. Select the appropriate source: Ad Hoc -- click the down arrow and select the appropriate ad hoc, and then click Import. Excel -- specify the starting cell and click the down arrow and select the worksheet from which to import, and then click Import. SegmentList.mdb -- click the ellipse button to browse and select the desired.mdb from which to import, and then click Import. Messages appear displaying the segment lists being imported and confirming when the import is complete. Click Close to close the panel. Note: When importing from an ad hoc or Excel spreadsheet, follow the supported format guidelines listed at the top of the Results window. 16. To perform a mass clean up of the segment list.mdb file based upon filter criteria, click the Cleanup Lists Database toolbar icon ( ). This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. 17. To display a list fields, click the Field Aliases toolbar icon ( Configurator, appears. ). A list fields, as defined in the To Refresh the Segment List File: Spreadsheet Server allows the user to refresh the segment list file without having to close and reopen Excel and restart Spreadsheet Server. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Refresh>Segment Lists. The system clears and rebuilds the memory of segment lists. Global Software, Inc.

74 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Using Segment Lists or Hierarchy Values in a GXL Formula A segment list or hierarchy value (a.k.a. parent group, set, etc.) may be used in a GXL formula by replacing any of the account segment values with the desired segment list or hierarchy value name. Insert a single caret symbol (^) prior to the segment list name in the formula. Note: For Infinium ledgers, the system supports the SSInfinium legacy process of inserting an at symbol (@) prior to a user list segment list name in the formula; however, a caret symbol may be used instead of an at symbol. Insert two carets symbols (^^) prior to the hierarchy value in the formula. Note: If a hierarchy value and segment list are assigned the same name -AND- a single caret (^) is used, the calculation will be based upon the hierarchy value instead of the segment list. In addition, if a specified hierarchy (i.e. ^^) does not exist, then the system will look for a match in the segment list file. If a specified segment list (i.e. ^) does not exist, then the system will look for a match in the hierarchy file. Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Formula Example - Using a Segment List: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";","2003","PER","6","01","*","^MiscExp","*"."*") Retrieves actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for all accounts included in the segment list MiscExp. Formula Example - Using a Segment List for a User List (Infinium Ledgers Only): Note: A segment list referencing user field values may be used in conjunction with account segment parameters (see Infinium GXL). =GXL ("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*") Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the user field criteria in the TAX segment list.

75 GL Reporting SSLDESC Formula Use the SSLDESC formula to retrieve the description for a segment list. Syntax: =SSLDESC("Segment List") Note: It is most common to use cell references within SSLDESC formulas to identify parameters. Formula Example: =SSLDESC("^MiscExp") Retrieves the segment list description for the MiscExp segment list. Global Software, Inc. 67

76 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 View or Modify Segment List Values from within Excel Spreadsheet Server allows a user to view from a worksheet, the values contained in a specific segment list. The user may also modify the values "on the fly". Lists can be shared among all Spreadsheet Server users so caution should be exercised when making modifications. 1. Select the desired cell that contains the segment list in question, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The Segment List Maintenance panel appears displaying the values for the selected segment list (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). 2. Segment list values may be added or removed as necessary. 3. In the event values for the segment list were altered, it is suggested to purge the balances in the cache file for the segment list. To purge balances, Click the Purge List from Cache toolbar icon ( ). 4. Once all modifications have been made, click X. The panel closes and returns focus to the spreadsheet. 5. In the event balances were purged in the cache file for the segment list, the GXL formula -or- the local cache will need to be manually recalculated (see Calculation Options or View/Refresh Local Cache).

77 GL Reporting 7.9 Calculations Calculation Options 69 Multiple options are available for retrieving and calculating data within Spreadsheet Server. 1. By default, the calculation function within Excel is set to calculate automatically. Global strongly recommends setting this value to manual so that all required spreadsheet changes or additions can be completed prior to recalculating. Nav Tip: From the SS Ribbon select Calculation Options, then select the appropriate setting. 2. The following options are available for calculating spreadsheets: F2+Enter Calculates the active cell. F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks. Shift+F9 Calculates the active worksheet. Ctrl+Alt+F9 Calculates all worksheets in all open workbooks, regardless of whether they have changed since the last calculation. Nav Tip: The majority of these options are also available from the SS Ribbon by selecting Recalc and then selecting the appropriate option. Global Software, Inc.

78 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 View/Refresh Local Cache When spreadsheets are calculated, Spreadsheet Server stores the account balances in the either the local or global cache database (based upon an option in the user's SS Settings). Spreadsheet Server looks first at the cache for account balances prior to retrieving the information from the host. As a result, it may be necessary to clear and recalculate the cache file when any of the following change since the prior calculation: Data on the host system Segment list Accounts profile While the workbook calculates, the value Pending appears in each cell containing a GXL formula and the status of Processing appears in the Excel status bar. Once all formulas are processed, the workbook is refreshed with the actual values and the status is changed to Ready". To View/Refresh Local Cache: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select View Cache. The Local Cache panel appears displaying cached records. 2. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear All button. To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button. To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then click the Clear Selected Sheet button. 3. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default Recalculation Option. If necessary, click the down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are: Trigger Excel to recalculate all open workbooks after closing the Local Cache panel. Trigger Excel to recalculate the last worksheet cleared after closing the Local Cache panel. Do not trigger Excel to recalculate the after closing the Local Cache panel. 4. Click Close. Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records. To Clear and Recalculate Local Cache: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Clear Cache and Recalculate. The system clears and recalculates cache.

79 GL Reporting 71 To Clear and Recalculate Local Cache for Selected Cells: 1. Select any cells on a sheet, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Clear Cache and Re-Calc Selected Cells. The system clears and recalculates cache for only the selected cells. Global Software, Inc.

80 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 View/Refresh Global Cache Two Global Cache cache types are available and require additional component(s) to be installed. Global Cache -- the Global SmartCache component must be installed on a web server or a server running Internet Information Services (IIS). Global Cache with Redis Technology -- both a Redis database and the Global SmartCache WRT component must be installed on a server. When GXL or GEXQ formulas are submitted to cache for calculation the system returns the value "Pending" as calculations occur. When items are pending the Cache icon on the ribbon is red, and when all items are completed the Cache icon is green. Pending items may be automatically refreshed in the workbook based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. To View/Refresh Global Cache: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select View Cache. The Global Cache panel appears displaying cached records. Global Cache Global Cache with Redis Technology 2. To view the cache records that are pending, in progress, completed or failed select accordingly: To view completed records in the cache -- click the View Completed button. To view currently caching records -- select the View In-Process button. To view pending cache records -- select the View Pending button. To view failed cache records -- select the View Errors button.

81 GL Reporting To reprocess the current records in the cache during an Excel session: To reprocess all records in the cache for the user -- click the Reprocess All Items button. To reprocess all records in the cache for all users -- click the Reprocess All Items All Users button. This function is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Note: After reprocessing the items in cache, the system does not automatically refresh the balances in the work book. Instead the user must select Recalculate from the SS Ribbon, in order to update the balances in the work book with the reprocessed values. 4. To refresh the account balances during an Excel session, the cache records should be cleared. To clear all records in the cache -- click the Clear Cache button. To clear selected records -- select the desired records in the grid and click the Clear Selected Rows button. To clear cache for a selected worksheet -- click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, and then click the Clear Selected Sheet button. Note: When using the Global Cache with Redis Technology, the option to Clear Buffer will appear on the Cache drop down list on the SS Ribbon. Select this option to clear the internal SmartCache buffer. 5. After the cache records have been cleared, the system assigns a default recalculation option. If necessary, click the down arrow and select a different recalculation option. Value options are: Trigger Excel to recalculate workbook after closing Global Cache. Trigger Excel to recalculate worksheet after closing Global Cache. Do Not Trigger Excel to recalculate after closing Global Cache. 6. Click Close. Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features. To Automatically Trigger the Global Cache Refresh: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Recalculate. The system recalculates cache. To Clear and Recalculate Cache for Selected Cells: 1. Select any cells on a sheet, then right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Clear Cache and Re-Calc Selected Cells. The system clears and recalculates cache for only the selected cells. To Use Buffering in Global Cache: When using Global Cache with Redis Technology, balances from different periods with the same account key may be returned from an internal buffer to speed up processing based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. When using buffering the option, Clear Buffer, appears in the Cache drop down list on the SS Ribbon allowing the user to clear the internal SmartCache buffer. Global Software, Inc.

82 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Disable/Enable Formula Calculations Disabling calculations will effectively halt the various Spreadsheet Server formula calculations when Excel calculates spreadsheets. As a result of disabling calculations, GXD and GEXQ formulas will return <SS Not Connected> values and GXL formulas will return zero values. When disabled, Spreadsheet Server does not communicate to the host. Disabling Spreadsheet Server formula calculations can be extremely useful when: Discontinuing calculation of a complex or long-running spreadsheet. A workbook is inadvertently opened whose calculation option is set to automatic. Creating a new worksheet or modifying an existing worksheet by adding columns and/or rows with Spreadsheet Server formulas, and switching a format to/from the range type period. To Disable Formula Calculations: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Enabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Disable) -or- select Tools>Disconnect All Open Connections. The system disconnects from the host system(s). To Enable Formula Calculations: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 2. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK. Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 2 is not applicable. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex

83 GL Reporting 7.10 Drill Down Functionality General Grid Features 75 Drill down panels in Spreadsheet Server offer the following features. Some of these basic grid features are also available in other functions (i.e. List Accounts, Local Cache, Execute Query). Feature Description Ad Hoc Drill Down To drill down from a predefined drill down panel (i.e. Account Balances, Journals, etc.) to data retrieved by an ad hoc query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used for drilling down (see Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc). The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level. Sub Queries To drill down from one drill down grid to data retrieved by a user-defined query, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Sub Queries. Then from the Sub Queries sub-menu, select the query to be used for drilling down. The Sub Queries option is only available when the user is licensed to the Query or Query Designer feature, and sub queries exist for the drill down (see Sub Query Column). Refresh To refresh data for the current drill down tab/panel, click the refresh button ( Display SQL Statement To display the execution time and SQL statement run for the current drill down tab/panel, click the information button ( ). Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To re-sort a column in descending order, click the column heading a second time. Autosize Columns To automatically resize column widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the header and/or data, right click and select Autosize. Re-size/Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and drag to the desired width. Move Columns To move a column, click and hold the column header and drag to the desired location. Copy To copy records to the Windows clipboard, select the desired record(s) in the grid, right click and select Copy to Clipboard (see Copy/Export Records). Dynamic Column Groupings To selectively group records and summarize amount columns by any column, drag the column heading into the summary section of the panel. To display detail records associated with a grouping, click the '+' next to the desired grouping level. Click the '-' to collapse the expanded view. Multiple levels of summary may be created. Global Software, Inc. ).

84 76 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Feature Description Filter Row To filter data in the grid, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value. Options Fly Out Use the Options fly out window to specify exporting options, to create and maintain custom Window grid layouts, and to control grouping and subtotaling options. The Options fly out window may be pinned to remain open. Export: Select All To select all rows in the grid, select Select All. Copy/Export To copy or export the drill down/query results data, select the desired rows in the grid, and then select the the appropriate copy/export function (see Copy/Export Records or Copy to Excel with Layout). Create Workbook To create a new workbook containing all the drill down/query results data, select Create Workbook, then specify the file name on the Save As panel and click Save.

85 GL Reporting 77 Feature Description Grid Layouts: By default the basic grid layout is displayed. Alternate layouts may be created and applied at a later time, or set as the default. List Box Displays the name of the layout currently being used. Click the down arrow and select the layout to be applied to the grid. AutoSize To automatically re-size columns widths in a grid to the maximum length required for the header and/or data, select AutoSize Column Headers. Fore Color / Back Color To change the color of the text or background color of the rows on the drill down grid, select Fore Color or Back Color, then select the desired color from the Color panel and click OK. Font To change the font of the text on the drill down grid, select Font and then select the desired font from the Font panel and click OK. Save Current Layout To save the current grid layout, click Save Current Layout. If the layout is new, then specify the name to be assigned to the new layout and click OK. Save Current Layout As To save the current grid layout as a new layout, select Save Current Layout As. Specify the name to be assigned to the new layout and click OK. Remove Layout From List To remove a layout, click the down arrow and select the layout to be removed, and then select Remove Layout From List. Use Default To apply the default layout to the grid, select Use Default. Note: This feature only applies to the ResultsContainer grid panel. Set Layout as To set a default layout to be used for the drill down level and/or query, click the down arrow and Default select the desired layout, and then select Set Layout as Default. Note: This feature only applies to Sub Query drill downs and ResultsContainer grid panels. Column Headers Groups and Subtotals: To display only the standard column headers, select Default Column Headers, or to display the SQL field name beside the standard column header, select Column Headers w/ SQL Fields. Note: This feature does not apply to Ad Hoc, Query or Sub Query drill downs, or ResultsContainer grid panels. To apply subtotals to grouped data, select the check box next to the desired column header description(s). To remove a subtotal, clear the check box for the desired column. Expand All To expand all grouped data in the grid, click the Expand All button. Collapse All To collapse all grouped data in the grid, click the Collapse All button. Sum Footers To display totals for numeric columns at the bottom of the drill down panel, select the Sum Footers check box. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, or Execute Query. Global Software, Inc.

86 78 Spreadsheet Server - Version Copy/Export Records Spreadsheet Server allows for copying or exporting records from various panels (i.e. drill down, List Accounts, Local Cache, ResultsContainer). Copying and/or exporting options may vary slightly for different functions; however, basic processing is the same. 1. From the drill down or List Accounts grid, select the desired record(s): To copy/export a single record -- select the desired record. To copy/export select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows. To copy/export multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. To copy/export all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options fly out window select Select All. 2. Right click and select the appropriate copy/export function -or- on the Options fly out window, select the appropriate copy/export function. Copy to Clipboard -- places data on Windows clipboard. Copy to Clipboard w/headings -- places data including headings on Windows clipboard. Copy to Excel (Simple) -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step 3. Copy to Excel with Layout -- displays the Export to Excel panel. See Copy to Excel with Layout. Export to CSV, PDF, RTF, or Excel (Full Format) -- brings up Windows Explorer panel. Export to Excel -- displays the Copy into Excel panel. See step On the Copy into Excel panel, specify the following processing criteria: Include Headings -- if selected, column headings are included in the copy. Select the appropriate radio button to indicate whether to copy to a worksheet, range or table destination. When copying to a worksheet, enter the starting cell in which to place the data and the target worksheet (new or existing). When copying to a range or table, click the down arrow to select select the desired range or table. 4. Click OK. The system copies the data to the selected destination. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts, List Accounts for a GXL Formula, View/Refresh Local Cache, or Execute Query.

87 GL Reporting Copy to Excel with Layout When copying selected drill down records to Excel, use the Copy to Excel with Layout function to apply the current grid layout to the copied data and to select other options such as grouping and subtotaling. 1. From the drill down grid, select the desired record(s): To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. To copy all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All -or- on the Options fly out window select Select All. 2. On the Options fly out window, select the Copy to Excel with Layout function. The Export to Excel panel appears. 3. Use the table to enter data on the Export to Excel panel. Field Description Excel Target Worksheet/Range Name/Table Specify whether to export to a worksheet, range or table destination. Available parameters will vary based upon the option selected. Target Global Software, Inc. Click the down arrow and select an existing worksheet, range or table to which to send the export data. When the Worksheet option is selected, a new name may be keyed in the field and the system will create the new worksheet when exporting the data.

88 80 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Starting Cell When the Worksheet option is selected, specify the starting cell into which to place the data. Convert to Table When the Worksheet option is selected, select the check box to indicate to create a new table when exporting the data -and- specify the name to be assigned to the new table in the associated field. Include Column Headings If selected, the export process includes column headers. Format Non-Numeric Cells as Text If selected, the system formats non-numeric target cells as text. Grouping and Subtotaling Group By Note: The following options do not apply when either the Excel Target Table or the Convert to Table option is selected. Click the down arrow and select the column(s) to subtotal. If column grouping has been defined in the data grid, the column grouped automatically appears as a selected value. Generate Outline for Subtotals If selected, the system activates Excel row grouping by subtotal for the exported data. Subtotal By 4. Select the corresponding check box to indicate to subtotal based on the chosen column(s). Button Function Reset Subtotal Clears all previously selected subtotal values. Export to Excel Exports selected data to the target destination. Cancel Cancels the export process and closes the panel. Click Export to Excel. The system copies the data and displays the worksheet containing the exported data. Click the link to go to a related topic: Copy/Export Records.

89 GL Reporting Drill Down to Detailed Account Balances Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from an amount on the spreadsheet to see what account balances make up the value. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings. 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Account Balances drill down appears showing the balance for each individual account. Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a panel or work sheet by selecting the SS Ribbon equivalent. Global Software, Inc.

90 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Drill Down to Summarized Account Balances Summary drill down functionality allows the user to select which account segments to use for grouping or summarizing the accounts when displaying the account balances which make up the single GXL value. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel, exclude zero balance accounts, and display or omit the Summary Drill Down prompt panel based upon options in the user's SS Settings. 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down>Summary Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Summary Drill Down. The Summary Drill Down panel appears listing account segments based upon the GXL formula and defaulting selections based upon the last time the function was used. Note: For JDE ledgers only, multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas may be selected. Nav Tip: This panel may be by-passed based upon an option in the user's SS Settings -or- by selecting the SS Ribbon equivalent. 2. On the Summary Drill Down panel, select the account segments to be used for summarizing. 3. Click OK. The Summary Drill Down appears showing the balance for each detail account summarized based upon the account segments selected on the previous panel (i.e. company, department, account in the example below). Note: The Journal List for Selected/All Accounts and Ad Hoc Drill Down options are not available from the Summary Drill Down panel.

91 GL Reporting Drill Down to Multi-Column Account Balances Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from multiple cells on the same row on a spreadsheet to see what account balances make up the values. A maximum of 80 columns may be selected. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet, and exclude zero balance accounts based upon options in the user's SS Settings. 1. Select multiple cells on the same row containing GXL formulas, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Multiple Account Balances drill down appears showing detail account balances for each column. If only two columns were selected, a variance column will automatically be displayed. Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a panel or work sheet by selecting the SS Ribbon equivalent. Global Software, Inc.

92 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Drill Down to Journals per Account(s) Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down to journals from detail account balances or directly from a GXL formula. When drilling down from detail account balances, the results appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. When drilling down directly from a GXL formula, results appear on a panel or worksheet based upon the method used to execute the function. Note: Drill down to journals displays YTD journals when the specified Format is LTD. This function is not applicable for Analyst, Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. For older versions of Infinium ledgers where the TXPJNO field does not exist, ensure that the exclude option is selected in the Configurator for the Infinium host configuration. To Drill Down to Journals from Detail Account Balances: 1. From the Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s): To select a single account -- double click the account. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected account. To select multiple accounts -- press and hold the Ctrl key as accounts are selected on the grid rows, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected accounts. To select multiple accounts in a range -- select the first account in the range, press and hold the Shift key and select the last account in the range, and then right click and select Journal List for Selected Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected accounts. To select all accounts in the grid -- right click and select Journal List for All Accounts. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected accounts. From the Multiple Account Balances drill down, select the desired account(s): To select a single account/period -- double click the desired account, specify the desired column number and click OK -or- double click the desired amount. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for the selected account/period. Note: To select multiple accounts, see above for basic processing steps.

93 GL Reporting For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. To Drill Down to Journals from a GXL Formula: 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon: To display results on a panel -- click Click Drill Down>Drill Down>Panel>GL Journals. The Journals drill down appears displaying journals for all accounts associated with the selected GXL formula (see screen shot above). To push results to a worksheet -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals. The system pushes the drill down journal results for all accounts associated with the selected GXL formula to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

94 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Drill Down to Journal Entry Lines Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the journal entry lines which make up the journal (batch). The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. Note: This function only applies to BPCS, Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. For BPCS ledgers, an option in the user's SS Settings controls a user's authority to this function. For Infinium and JDE ledgers, user settings in the Configurator control a user's authority to this function. 1. From the Journals drill down, double click the desired journal -or- select the desired journal, right click and select Display All Lines of Selected Journal. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying all the entry lines for the journal. 2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system.

95 GL Reporting Drill Down to Detail Journal Entry Lines Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the detail journal entry lines which make up the journal. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. Note: This function only applies to BPCS ledgers. 1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Detail Journal Lines. The Journal Entry Lines drill down appears displaying detail journal entry lines for the journal. 2. For BPCS 6+ users only, click the Analysis Fields button to populate the analysis fields on the current panel. Warning: Response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. Global Software, Inc.

96 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Drill Down to Subsystem Detail Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from journals to the subsystem detail which make up the journal. The drill down results can appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. Note: This function only applies to Infinium, JDE, and Movex ledgers. 1. From the Journals drill down, select the desired journal, right click and select View Subsystem Detail. The Sub System Lines drill down appears displaying subsystem details for the journal.

97 GL Reporting Drill Down to Selected Ad Hoc Spreadsheet Server allows drilling down from a predefined drill down panel or directly from a GXL formula to an ad hoc query. The Ad Hoc Drill Down option is only available when the user is licensed to the General Ledger feature, ad hoc processing is allowed (a Configurator security setting), and ad hoc queries exist for the predefined drill down level. When drilling down from another drill down panel, the results appear in a single panel or tabbed panel based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. When drilling down directly from a GXL formula, results appear on a panel or worksheet based upon the method used to execute the function. Note: When processing an ad hoc query drill down, the list of available ad hoc queries is controlled by the Filter by GL option on the Settings - Ad Hoc Queries panel (see SS Settings). To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a Drill Down Panel: 1. From the predefined drill down panel, select the desired record(s) in the grid: To select a single record -- click the record. To select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected on the grid rows. To select multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key and select the last record in the range. To select all records in the grid -- right click and select Select All. 2. Right click and select Ad Hoc Drill Down. Then from the Ad Hoc Drill Down sub-menu select the query to be used for drilling down. The system displays the appropriate Ad Hoc Drill Down panel. To Drill Down to a Selected Ad Hoc from a GXL Formula: 1. Select a cell containing a GXL formula, then from the SS Ribbon: To display results on a panel -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Panel>GL Journals>Prompt. The Select an Ad Hoc Query panel appears. To push results to a worksheet -- click Drill Down>Drill Down>Worksheet>GL Journals>Prompt. The Select an Ad Hoc Query panel appears. 2. Select the query to be used for drilling down and click OK. The drill down results for all accounts associated with the GXL formula are displayed on a panel or pushed to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

98 90 Spreadsheet Server - Version Miscellaneous Features List Accounts Spreadsheet Server enables the user to generate a list of existing accounts. Filtering is available to control which accounts are listed. Note: This function is not applicable for Designer GL ledgers. 1. In Excel right click and select Spreadsheet Server>List Accounts. The List Accounts panel appears. 2. On the List Accounts panel, specify the desired criteria (fields vary based upon selected ledger) and filter for which accounts to display, and then click the List Accounts button. The appropriate accounts are displayed on the List Accounts panel. If the filter is left blank, the system will retrieve all account masters. When using a filter, a valid account string combination should be used. In addition, the filter can include masks, ranges, and/or segment lists. Click the link to go to a related topic: List Accounts for a GXL Formula, General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records.

99 GL Reporting Account Security An Accounts Profile allows an administrator to control the account strings that a particular user may access. An Accounts Profile may be set up via the Maintain Accounts Profile button (see instructions below) or via the Configurator. If Override User Account Profile values are assigned to the user in the Configurator, then the Maintain Accounts Profile function is only used to display, not maintain, the Accounts Profile. Note: This feature is not applicable for Infinium, JDE or Oracle ledgers, nor does it apply when processing queries in Query Designer or in Excel. Refer to the Oracle Database Security Notes section in the Configurator User Manual for Oracle security processing. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears. 2. Select GL Reporting on the navigation pane. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - GL Reporting panel appears. 3. Click the Maintain Accounts Profile button. The Accounts Profile panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting Accounts Profile from the ribbon on the Control Panel GL Balances tab. 4. Click the Segment Labels down arrow and select the ledger or Designer GL definition for which to display account segments. 5. In the Account Mask fields on the Accounts Profile panel, specify the account string to which the user will have access and click the Add button. Single account values, masks, ranges, value lists and segment lists. When using a segment list, the segment list may not include "excluded" values. A maximum of 20 different account strings is allowed per profile. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all account masks for the account profile have been added. 7. To remove an account mask from the list, select the value in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks from the list, click the Clear All button. Global Software, Inc.

100 92 Spreadsheet Server - Version To lock the account profile for security purposes (i.e. prevent others from making changes to the account profile), click the Lock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the desired password and click OK. This password is required to change the account profile. It is not mandatory to lock an account profile. 9. To unlock the account profile, click the Unlock icon button. The Password dialog box appears. Enter the valid password and click OK. Note: In the event the individual password is lost or forgotten, contact your administrator for the override password. 10. When the account profile is complete, click the Close button.

101 GL Reporting SS Validation Spreadsheet Server gives the user the ability to create a validation list in a specific cell in Excel. Validation lists are drop down lists that allow the user to choose from a valid list of options/field values. 1. Select a cell to hold the validation list, then from the SS Ribbon select Tools>Data Validation -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Validation. The Data Validation panel displays. The available types of data on the panel vary based upon the selected ledger. 2. Select the type of data for which to build a list -or- enter valid values separated by a comma in the Custom field, and click OK to push validation to the current cell. When Year is selected, a prompt panel appears allowing the user to specify the range of years to be included in the validation list. Note: Validation Lists are limited by Excel to 255 characters. 3. On the Excel worksheet when the appropriate cell is selected, a drop down button appears indicating that valid values exist for the cell. Click on the drop down arrow button to display the Validation List. 4. Click on the desired value. The system returns the selected value to the appropriate cell. 5. To maintain valid values for a cell, select the cell and from the Excel menu, select Data>Validation -or- from the Excel ribbon select Data>Data Tools>Data Validation. The Data Validation panel appears. Refer to Excel Help for additional instructions. Global Software, Inc.

102 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Generate Account Detail for Current Sheet The Generate Account Detail option allows the user to create an audit trail which lists the individual accounts and balances included in the GXL formulas of the worksheet. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Generate Reports>Account Detail Report. The Generate Account Detail Options panel appears. 2. On the Generate Account Detail Options panel, specify the following processing criteria: Source Worksheet Input - Column - Identify the column within the worksheet that contains the report line description. This description is used as the first column in the extracted audit trail. Source Worksheet Input - Row - Identify the first row containing a GXL formula to be used in generating the detail. This will set the starting point for the extracted audit trail. Target Options - Indicate whether to copy the selected records to the standard Windows clipboard or to paste data directly to a target worksheet in the spreadsheet. When pasting directly to a worksheet, a starting cell into which to place the data and a target worksheet (new or existing) must be specified. 3. Click OK. An audit trail showing the line description, all included accounts, and their balances will be generated.

103 GL Reporting Expand Detail Reports (GXE) The Expand Detail option allows the user to select a single or multiple financial statement lines using GXL formulas and expand the line(s) into the individual account details, similar to the Generate Account Detail option. This process is primarily used to launch detailed financial statements into the same template. This option can be used for multiple departments to ensure consistency for each report. Instead of creating each possible account number as different rows in the spreadsheet, a single line can be created that contains ranges, segment lists, or wildcards. This line will then be expanded into the applicable individual accounts and placed into a formatted worksheet via table, range, or row. The maximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. See Expand to Account Balances. Additionally, the Expand Detail option allows the user to create a detail journal voucher listing for a specific summary balance of accounts using the GXE formula. This process works similarly to the Expand Detail option for account detail, but uses additional parameters. See Expand to Journals. The GXE formula contains a Part 1 and Part 2. Both parts are identical. Optionally use Part 2 to add a second GXE calculation in a single GXE formula, thus allowing for both account and journal details to be expanded from one GXE formula. Global Software, Inc.

104 96 Spreadsheet Server - Version Expand to Account Balances 1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single report line becomes the basis for the expanded report. When the process is executed the single line will be expanded into individual account lines and placed into the final formatted worksheet (see below). The maximum number of columns to be expanded is based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. The example below shows a report based on an account mask. GXL formulas are created in a single line. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cells B9: B13. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency) are entered in each column heading (B1:C7). The actual GXL formulas are contained in cells B16 and C16. Standard Excel formula is used to calculate the variance in cell D16. Various literals are entered in cells E16:K16. This designation will generate the associated value into that particular column. Valid literals are ACCTNUM (account number), ACCTDESC (account description) and ACCTSEGnn (where nn equals the account segment number, such as 01, 02, 03, etc.). Note: The GXE summarizes the generated results based upon the account segment literals (i.e. ACCTSEG01, ACCTSEG02, etc.) specified on the GXE source detail row. The account segment literals entered on the source detail row will override the value entered in the Summarize Balance Level field to determine how to summarize the results. Example: Account String = Company, Department, Account, Sub-Account Data: A, B, C, A, B Ex 1: Source Row contains ACCTSEG03 only; GXE Results = 1000 Ex 2: Source Row contains ACCTSEG01 and ACCTSEG03; GXE Results = and Note: The GXE also supports legacy SSInfinium user field literals (UF01, UF02, UF03 and UF04), in addition to legacy SSJDE account (i.e. ACCTCO, ACCTBU, ACCTOBJ, etc.) and category code (CATCODE, CATDESC) literals.

105 GL Reporting Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row and parameters for the formula. Field Description Example Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 18 Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. GXE Source Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. GXE Target Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. 16 Target Table, Range, Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target or Row worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. Note: When using a target range, identify the Excel range as all cells under the columns headers. In the example, Range1 is for cells A5 thru J5. Range1 Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. N Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. N Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: This value MUST be N when a TABLE or RANGE is specified for the Target Table/Range/Row parameter. N Journals Only Column Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Journals Ad Hoc Query Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Summarize Balance If desired, specify the account segment number (break level) to be Level used for summarizing data when expanding account balances. Note: Any ACCTSEGnn literals entered on the Source Detail Row will override this value. 4 In addition for JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. 3. Total Journal Level Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) Convert Journals to Table Not applicable when using the GXE to expand account detail. (leave blank) After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formula are inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above). Formula Example: =GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30) Global Software, Inc.

106 98 Spreadsheet Server - Version Format the Target Worksheet with headings in rows 1-3, blank rows in rows 4-6, and totals in row 7. Set each total to a range of rows 4-6 (i.e. =SUM(B4:B6)). When the Expand Detail Reports function is initiated, the total line is shifted down or up, based upon the number of data rows populated each time the expansion is processed. 5. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>All Detail Reports (GXE Formulas). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GXE Formula) -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

107 GL Reporting Expand to Journals Note: The GXE expand to journals feature is not applicable for Analyst ledgers. 1. Create a standard Spreadsheet Server report for the GXL formula using Build a Template (see Build a Template). The single balance becomes the basis for the journal entry detail. When the process is executed the single column balance will be expanded into detail journal lines and placed into the target worksheet (see below). The example below shows a GXL formula totaling on an account mask. In the example, the account string parameters are shown in cells B10:B14. The balance parameters of the GXL (i.e. type, budget name, year, format, period, translated, currency) are entered in the cells B1:B7. The actual GXL formula is contained in cell B Using Build a Template (see Build a Template) for the GXE formula, define the starting column and row and parameters for the formula. Field Description Example Starting Column Specify the starting column for the template. A Starting Row Specify the starting row for the template. 19 Global Software, Inc.

108 100 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Source Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the summary formulas that will be expanded. GXE Source Target Worksheet Specify the name of the worksheet that contains the final formatted worksheet and will receive the expanded detail. GXE Target Source Detail Row Specify the row number in the source worksheet that contains the summary formulas. 17 Target Table, Range, Specify the target table, range name, or first row on the target or Row worksheet to begin inserting the expanded detail. 1 Headings Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to include column headings when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Autofit Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to autofit columns when expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Clear Sheet Enter Y or N to indicate whether or not to clear the target worksheet before expanding details. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Y Journals Only Column Specify the column containing the GXL balance for which to generate journal detail. B Journals Ad Hoc Query If desired, identify the ad hoc query to be used to generate journal detail. Note: An ad hoc query is required to expand journal detail for Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers. Summarize Balance For JDE ledgers only, if desired specify field alias or field name Level (as defined in the Configurator) for an AcctCatCode or BUCatCode to control how to group expanded data. Otherwise field is not applicable when using the GXE to expand journal detail. (leave blank) Total Journal Level If desired, specify the account segment number for which to generate 4 subtotals when expanding journal entry details. Subtotals are generated at the selected level and each previous level. Note: This function is not applicable for Data Warehouse or Designer GL ledgers. For SAP ledgers the maximum allowable segment number for totaling is '4'. If a segment level greater than the number of segments allowed by the ledger is entered, the system will use the maximum allowable number of segments. Note: For JDE ledgers only, when the Summarize Balance Level is an AcctCatCode or field alias or field name then an 'extra' account segment representing the category code is added to the front of the account string. This will need to be tak en into consideration when specifying the account segment number for which to generate subtotals. Convert Journals to Table If desired, click the down arrow and select whether or not to place N expanded journal entry details into a table. When this option is used, the system creates a new table on the specified target worksheet and assigns the next available standard Excel table name. The table includes headers and grand totals, except when a journals ad hoc query is used. This option is ignored if the specified Target is a range or table, or if Total Journal Level is not blank. If not specified, N (No) is assumed. Note: When this option is set to Y and have multiple GXEs to journals in the work book, then set the Clear Sheet option to Y to avoid errors.

109 GL Reporting After the GXE data has been entered and verified, click the Insert icon or button. The parameters and GXE formula are inserted to the selected worksheet (see the sample spreadsheet above). Formula Example: =GXE(B20,B19,B22,B21,B23,B24,B25,B26,B27,B28,B29,B30) 4. To generate detail reports for all GXE formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>All Detail Reports (GXE Formulas). The results for all GXE formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GXE formula, select the cell containing the GXE formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GXE Formula) -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GXE). The results for the selected GXE formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet. Global Software, Inc.

110 102 Spreadsheet Server - Version Hide Rows with Zero Balances The Hide Rows with Zero Balances function will analyze the active workbook or worksheet and perform a row hide function for any spreadsheet row that contains GXL formulas in which the net result is zero for all cells. This function is very effective for standardized reporting templates such as departmental reports. Multiple rows can be created as a template but the function can then hide non-used or zero rows. To Hide Rows with Zero Balances in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Hide Rows with Zero Balances. To Hide Rows with Zero Balances on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Hide Rows>Hide Zero Balance Rows (Worksheet). To Restore Hidden Rows in the Workbook: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Restore Hidden Rows (Workbook). To Restore Hidden Rows on the Worksheet: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Restore Rows>Restore Hidden Rows (Worksheet).

111 GL Reporting Reset Host Server Connection Spreadsheet Server allows the user to switch from one host server to another without having to close and restart Excel. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Enabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Disable) -or- select Tools>Disconnect All Open Connections. The system disconnects from the host system(s). 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The appropriate Login or Sign On dialog box appears based upon the selected ledger. Note: For Data Warehouse and Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. 3. Enter the appropriate data on the Login or Sign On dialog box, and then click Login or OK. Note: When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, step 3 is not applicable. Use the following links to access ledger specific sign on information: Analyst Data Warehouse Jack Henry 20/20 Oracle BPCS 4.05 Designer GL JD Edwards PeopleSoft BPCS 6.02 Infinium Lawson SAP BPCS 6.04 Jack Henry Silverlake Movex Global Software, Inc.

112 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 SS View Log During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Tools>View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, task ID, and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the Spreadsheet Server Settings General panel. Note: To select a different time format or font size, click the respective drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner. 2. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then either click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range.

113 GL Reporting To the entire log file to the helpdesk, click the Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the log file attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. Note: When ing the log via the View Log button from the Settings function, system information is automatically added to the body of the To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired message type(s), date/time range, containing text, class, method and/or task ID in the Filter section. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. Click the Clear Filter button to reset all filter fields to their default value. 5. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 6. To clear the log file, click the Clear Log button. 7. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panel appears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in the list. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button to return to the Log Viewer panel. 8. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button. Global Software, Inc.

114 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Upgrade Segment List The Upgrade Segment List function is used to convert pre-v14 Spreadsheet Server segment lists to the revised V14 segment list file format. A user's ability to upgrade/maintain segment lists is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Note: If the segment list has not been converted to the revised V14 format, then the user may be prompted to convert the segment list file during the install of V14, when starting Spreadsheet Server, or when accessing the Segment List function. To Upgrade the Segment List File: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Upgrade Segment List. The Upgrade Segment List panel appears. 2. Click OK. The system makes a backup of the segment list file, converts the file and displays message(s) indicating the results. Note: After the segment list upgrade process is complete, Global recommends reviewing all segment lists via the Segment List function.

115 GL Reporting Upgrade Workbook The Upgrade Workbook function is used to convert various legacy Spreadsheet Server and EDASH formulas in a workbook to revised Spreadsheet Server formulas. Legacy Formulas Revised Formulas Ledger(s) GXA, GXAB, GXU, FXA (see note) GXL BPCS, Infinium, JDE, Movex, select Designer GLs EXQ, EXD, EXI, EXS GEXQ, GEXD, GEXI, GEXS respectively not applicable Description formulas (i.e. GXD, BUDESC, CODESC) GXD Infinium, JDE Report formulas (i.e. GXE, GXECC) GXE Infinium, JDE GXSALES GXSALES JDE Note: Legacy JDE FXA formulas convert to JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL formulas. To Upgrade a Workbook: 1. Open the workbook containing the formula(s) to be converted, then from the SS Ribbon select Tools>Upgrade Workbook. The Upgrade Workbook Options panel appears. The available options will vary based upon the selected ledger and the user's licensed features. 2. Select the desired formula(s) to be converted, then click Convert. The system makes a backup of the workbook, converts the formulas accordingly and displays message(s) indicating the results. Note: After converting legacy JDE FXA formulas assigned to multiple host configurations (i.e. SSFXA1, SSFXA2), manual intervention may be required to modify the Designer GL definition assigned to the GXL formulas. Global Software, Inc.

116 108 Spreadsheet Server - Version Analyst Analyst Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Analyst ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol being used: Options 1 - iseries or SQL Server: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries or SQL Server sign on Password - standard iseries or SQL Server password Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator

117 GL Reporting 109 Option 3 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

118 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Analyst Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Analyst panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Analyst Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

119 GL Reporting Analyst Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Analyst ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Valid values are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY. Budget Name When Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY, click the down arrow and select the budget name for which to retrieve data. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

120 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Analyst GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Analyst ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Data Type","Budget Name","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Data Type Identifies the data type. Valid types are ACTUALAMT, ACTUALQTY, BUDGETAMT, and BUDGETQTY. Budget Name Identifies the budget name. This value is required when Data Type is BUDGETAMT or BUDGETQTY. Key 3 Currently not used. Enter 0. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, GL Account, Department, Product, Sales Rep, Region, Customer Type, Budget Account, Employee). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("ACTUALAMT","*","2004","PER","1","10","1*","*","*","*","*","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2004 with a mask for every GL account beginning with "1".

121 GL Reporting 113 Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

122 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Analyst GXD For an Analyst ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Num","Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Num Identifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Value Identifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("2","1200") Retrieves the description for account segment 2 value Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD("1","10")& "-" &GXD("2","1200") Retrieves the description for company segment 10 and concatenates the description for account segment Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

123 GL Reporting 7.13 BPCS BPCS Sign On 115 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a BPCS ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 thru 5 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password 4. Click OK. 5. For BPCS 6.02 users only, on the BPCS Chart of Accounts Name panel specify the name of the chart of accounts to be used and click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

124 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 BPCS 4.05 Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 4.05CD panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS 4.05CD Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded and Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS 4.05CD Library Options: Budget Library Specify the name of the library containing budget data. Budget File Name Specify the name of the file containing budget data. Library for RCOL01 Specify the name of the library containing the RCOL01 file. BPCS 4.05CD Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXL/Drill Down: Include Consolidated Accounts If selected, the GXL formula and drill downs include consolidated accounts in the account balance.

125 GL Reporting Field 117 Description Drill Down: Allow Journal Lines If selected, drill down to journal lines is allowed. This function is password protected. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts. BPCS 4.05CD Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

126 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 BPCS 6.02 Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS 6.02 panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS 6.02 Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances and If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS 6.02 Chart of Account Options: Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the BPCS chart of accounts from which to retrieve data. Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company, Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.

127 GL Reporting Field 119 Description Segments 1-14 Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed if necessary. Account Segment Number Used for GXD Descriptions Specify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions for GXD formulas and on the Account Balances drill down panel. BPCS 6.02 Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXE: Display Analysis Data in If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXE Journal Results formula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Preference Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in the journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted. BPCS 6.02 Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them based upon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of available chart of accounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

128 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 BPCS Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Sever Settings - Ledger Specifics - BPCS panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description BPCS Connection Options: Retrieve Account Balances If selected, Spreadsheet Server retrieves GL balances from the preloaded and Descriptions for Preloaded local PC database. Otherwise, the system retrieves balances from the Local PC Database host General Ledger system. Operate Completely Disconnected from Host When Retrieve Account Balances and Descriptions for Preloaded Local PC Database and this option are selected, the user works disconnected from the host system and is unable to drill down to journal entry detail. BPCS Chart of Account Options: Default Chart of Accounts Click the down arrow and select the appropriate BPCS chart of accounts from which to retrieve data. Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the number of segments in the account structure (i.e. Company, Division, etc.) and to be displayed in Spreadsheet Server.

129 GL Reporting Field Segments Description Specify the title for each account segment in the account structure. These default based upon the chart of accounts selected, but may be changed if necessary. BPCS Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. GXE: Display Analysis Data in If selected, Analysis Data fields are populated when expanding the GXE Journal Results formula for journals. When selected, response time will vary based upon the size of the journal detail file on the host system. List Accounts: Exclude Inactive Accounts If selected, the List Accounts function excludes inactive accounts. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display in the Preference journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted. BPCS Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Button Function Load Local PC Database Displays the Load Local PC Database panel, allowing the user to download account balances to a local database in order to optimize calculation speeds (see BPCS Load Local Data). Refresh Clears the current segment descriptions and then retrieves them based upon the selected chart of accounts, and refreshes the list of available chart of accounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

130 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 BPCS Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a BPCS ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Datagroup (Version 4.05) Specify the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB, and CBnn (where nn is the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Specify the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Specify the CEA book. Year (Version 6+) Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, PERJ, QTRJ and YTDJ. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

131 GL Reporting BPCS GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a BPCS ledger. Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXL("Datagroup","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXL("Ledger","Book","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Datagroup (Version 4.05) Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn (where nn equals the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA book. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Year (Version 6+) Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel Global Software, Inc.

132 124 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-14 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values: =GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","000","15130") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using a Mask and a Range: =GXL("JRH","JRH-E ACT","0","2001","PER","4","50","*"," ") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2001 for all departments for the account range of thru Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

133 GL Reporting BPCS GXD For a BPCS ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. For BPCS 6.02 ledgers, an option in the user's Ledger Specific Settings determine the account segment used to retrieve the account description. Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXD("Account String") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXD("Account String","Ledger") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Formula Example - Version 4.05: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string Formula Example - Version 6+: =GXD(" ","JRH") Retrieves the account description for the account string from the JRH ledger. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

134 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 BPCS 6+ GSV For a BPCS Version 6+ ledger only, the GSV formula is used to retrieve a segment description for any segment in the account string. Syntax - Version 6+: =GSV("Segment Value","Segment Name") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GSV formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Name The segment name represents the exact name of the segment within CEA. Formula Example: =GSV("540","DEPT") Retrieves the segment description for DEPT 540.

135 GL Reporting BPCS GXA The GXA formula is a legacy formula used to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXA formula for a BPCS ledger. Note: The GXA formula has been retained for back wards compatibility with prior Spreadsheet Server releases. The GXL formula has been created to replace the GXA formula (see BPCS GXL). Use the Upgrade Work book function to convert GXA formulas to GXL formulas (see Upgrade Work book ). Syntax - Version 4.05: =GXA("Account String","Datagroup","Format","Period","Key 3") Syntax - Version 6+: =GXA("Account String","Ledger","Book","Year","Format","Period","Key 3") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXA formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String The account string represents the account segments delimited by a dash. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, or segment list (see Account Segment Syntax). Datagroup (Version 4.05) Identifies the data type. Valid options are CURRENT, PRIOR, FUTURE, BUDGETA, BUDGETB and CBnn (where nn equals the budget number). Ledger (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA ledger. Book (Version 6+) Identifies the CEA book. Year (Version 6+) Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified PERJ Period activity for the selected month, including unposted JVs QTRJ Activity for periods included in the selected quarter number, including unposted JVs YTDJ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel Global Software, Inc.

136 128 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "STAT" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library to be used. If left blank, Spreadsheet Server uses the library specified during sign on. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Single Values: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4") Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account string. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Statistics: =GXA("50-*-*","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","STAT") Retrieves the statistics balances from the actual book within the JRH ledger for period 4 for an account mask. Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Alternate Library Name: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2001","PER","4","BPCS") Retrieves the monetary balance for period 4 of 2001 for a single account from the alternate library, BPCS.

137 GL Reporting 129 Formula Example - Version 6+ - Using Budget Manager: =GXA(" ","JRH","JRH-E ACT","2004" "PER","4","Budget:Fiscal2005:003") Retrieves the budget balance from budget Fiscal2005 revision 003, for period 4 of 2004 for a single account string. Global Software, Inc.

138 130 Spreadsheet Server - Version BPCS Load Local Data For BPCS ledgers, the option exists to download account balance information into a local database, allowing for optimized calculation speeds. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings button on the Control Panel. 2. From the navigation pane under Ledger Specifics, select the appropriate BPCS ledger. The selected Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics panel appears. 3. On the Ledger Specifics panel, click the Load Local PC Database button. The Load Local PC Database panel appears. 4. The top portion of the panel identifies the location for the local database. This setting defaults from user's SS Settings but may be changed by clicking the Browse button and selecting a new location. 5. Select whether or not to include the chart of accounts and/or segment descriptions in the download. In addition, the middle portion of the panel displays the existing data in the database. Click the ledger to be downloaded. To make multiple selections, hold down the Ctrl key and click on the desired ledgers -or- to select all ledgers, click the Select All button. 6. Once selection is complete, click the Load BPCS Local Database button. The progress of the download displays on the bottom portion of the panel. To stop the download process, click the Stop Loading button. 7. When the download is complete, click OK.

139 GL Reporting 7.14 Data Warehouse Data Warehouse Sign On 131 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Data Warehouse ledger. Note: When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

140 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Data Warehouse Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Data Warehouse panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Warehouse Options: Current Profile Click the down arrow and select the Data Warehouse profile to load. Data Warehouse Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Button Function Load Data Warehouse Displays the Load Data Warehouse From GL panel. Use this panel to load data into the Data Warehouse profile. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

141 GL Reporting Data Warehouse Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Data Warehouse ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Key 1 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type Key 2 This header and field value will vary based upon requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Profile Click the down arrow and select the desired Data Warehouse profile. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

142 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Data Warehouse GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Data Warehouse ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Key1","Key2","Year","Format","Period","Profile","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Balance Type Key 2 Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Ex: Organization Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Profile Identifies the Data Warehouse profile. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("Actuals","ABC","2009","PER","1","SS_Sample","ABC","1*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 1 of 2009 with a mask for every account beginning with "1".

143 GL Reporting 135 Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

144 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Data Warehouse GXD For a Data Warehouse ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected Data Warehouse profile. Formula Example: =GXD("ABC","115","00","01") Retrieves the account description for the account string ABC Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

145 GL Reporting 7.15 Designer GL Designer GL Sign On 137 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Designer GL ledger. Note: When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). Note: For most Designer GL ledgers, no dialog box appears. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

146 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Designer GL Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Designer GL Options: File Name Specify the Designer GL file name. Connection Name Click the down arrow and select the connection name. Right click and select Refresh to refresh the data. Key 1 Caption Specify the caption for key 1. Key 1 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 1 drop down list. Key 2 Caption Specify the caption for key 2. Key 2 Data Validation Specify the values to be included in the Key 2 drop down list. QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. SAP: Secondary Database Connection For SAP designer GLs only, if desired specify the name of the secondary database connection to be used for processing.

147 GL Reporting Field 139 Description SQL TRIM Supported If selected, the TRIM function used in SQL to remove a specified prefix or suffix from a string is supported. Preload HSegments If selected, HSegment values are preloaded into cache when Spreadsheet Server is started. If not selected, the Hierarchy option in the Locate Segment function is disabled, as there are no values to display. Reset Connections on Clear Cache & Recalculate If selected, the system closes and reopens connections when the Clear Cache & Recalculate function is processed in an effort to improve performance. This option should only be selected in specific scenarios. Please contact Global prior to selecting this option. Button Function Set Default Designer GL Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select/set the default Designer GL without having to enter a password. Load Default GL Definition Loads the default Designer GL data on the panel. This function is password protected. Browse for GL Definition Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and select a Designer GL. This function is password protected. Refresh Acct Key Sec Cache Refreshes the account segment security cache to process any changes made to ad hoc files. Save Saves changes to the Designer GL definition. Note: The various Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Designer GL - suboptions are used to maintain Designer GL definitions. These panels are password protected. Contact Global for more information. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

148 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Designer GL Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Designer GL ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Key 1 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 1 = Library Key 2 Click the down arrow and select a value, or manually key a value (see note). The header and field value will vary based upon selected Designer GL requirements. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Designer GL Defaults the value from Available Designer GL Definitions. Available Designer GL Definitions Click the down arrow and select a Designer GL Definition from which to retrieve data. After selecting a value, the system changes the parameters on the panel to match the selected definition. Note: The system does not verify that the value manually keyed is a valid value (i.e. contained in the drop down list). Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

149 GL Reporting Designer GL GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Designer GL ledger. Note: The Designer GL definition for APlus is being used in the examples below. Syntax: =GXL("Key 1","Key 2","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Key 1 Value entered for key 1 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex: APlus - Key 1 - Library Key 2 Value entered for key 2 parameter will vary based upon the requirements for the selected Designer GL. Ex: APlus - Key 2 = Balance Type Key 3 Identifies the Designer GL Definition. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Note: For ASI Designer GLs ONLY, when the actual account segment value is '*' in the GL database, use '#' in the GXL formula instead of '*' for the account segment value. Global Software, Inc.

150 142 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8050","5010"," ") Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 for a range of account codes 310 to 350. Formula Example - Using a Mask: =GXL("APLUS","ACTUAL","CUSTOMGL="APLUS";","2007","PER","8","1","0000","0","8*","5010","310") Retrieves the actual activity for period 8 of 2007 with a mask for every department beginning with "8". Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

151 GL Reporting 7.16 Infinium Infinium Sign On 143 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Infinium ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Retrieve account balances from local database Option 2 - <Sign-On>: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password Retrieve account balances from local database 4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following: Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database path Work in Local Mode without a connection Note: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, Infinium security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive. 5. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

152 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Infinium Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Infinium panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Infinium Segment Options: Number of Segments in Account Structure Specify the maximum number of account segments to be used for processing in Spreadsheet Server. Account Segments Specify the name for each account segment. User Fields Specify the name for each user field. Infinium Processing Options: GXL: Include Opening Balance If selected, the GXL formula includes opening balances when calculating in YTD Format Calculations the YTD format. Infinium Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

153 GL Reporting Infinium Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Infinium ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are M (Monetary), S (Statistical), D (Debit Balances), C (Credit Balances), 1 (Numeric User Field 1) and 2 (Numeric User Field 2). Note: Currency must be blank when balance type is S. Budget/Actuals Specify whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the name of the budget. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code, or leave blank when retrieving statistical balances. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. Database Library If applicable, specify the database library from which to retrieve the data. The library entered here overrides the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process. Global Software, Inc.

154 146 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Append If selected, adds an AND/OR user list comparison to the account string criteria. And/Or When Append is selected, specify the appropriate user list criteria operand. Valid values are AND (account must meet both the account string and user list criteria) and OR (account must meet either the account string or user list criteria). User List When Append is selected, specify the user list to be used by the formula. Note: The user list must be established in the segment list file (see Create/Maintain Segment Lists). The syntax used for entering the user list (where nnnn is the user list name). User Fields Click the down arrow and select whether to toggle the account segments to user fields. Valid values are NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

155 GL Reporting Infinium GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Infinium ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget/Actuals","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Balance types are: M Monetary balances S Statistical balances (currency code must be blank) D Debit balances C Credit balances 1 Numeric User Field 1 2 Numeric User Field 2 Budget/Actuals Identifies whether to retrieve actual or budget data. Valid values are ACTUALS or the budget name. The value in Key 2 is ignored when the Key 3 parameter contains references to Budget Manager. Key 3 Optionally identifies currency, alternate database library, append user list (AND or OR), use user fields instead of account segments, and/or Budget Manager name/revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Must be blank when retrieving statistical balances. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the alternate library which overrides the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process. Enter the literal "ANDUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet both the account string and user list criteria. Enter the literal "ORUSERLIST:NNNN" where NNNN is the user list name. Account must meet either the account string or user list criteria. Enter the literal "INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=X" where X is NA (use account segments), Y (use user fields), or N (use account segments). If not specified, NA is assumed. Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXX is the budget revision. Year Year identifier. Global Software, Inc.

156 148 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding or including the opening balance based upon an option on the Setting's Ledger Specifics panel LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Segment 2-9). The number of account segments are based upon the number specified in the user's Ledger Specifics Settings. May be a single value, BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Single Values: =GXL("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=","2001","PER","1","001","000","1070","001") Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for account string

157 GL Reporting 149 Formula Example - Using User Fields: =GXL ("M","Actuals","CURRENCY=USD";"LIBRARY=";"INFINIUMUSERFIELDS=Y","2001","PER","1","001","BEN","4000", "DIST","PROD") Retrieves the actual monetary activity for period 1 of 2001 for company 001 using user fields 1, 2, 3 and 4 criteria. Formula Example - Using a User List: =GXL ("M","Actuals","LIBRARY=";"CURRENCY=USD";"ANDUSERLIST=@Tax","2002","YTD","11","001","310","6*","*") Retrieves actual monetary year-to-date activity thru period 11 for accounts beginning with 6 which also meet the user field criteria in the TAX segment list. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

158 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Infinium GXD For an Infinium ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. In the event multiple accounts are referenced in a single GXD formula, then the system returns the description for the first account string found, and adds a warning message to the log indicating that the GXD results returned more than one record. Syntax: =GXD("Library","Account String") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Library Identifies the alternate library from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional. If left blank, the system uses the default library in the Configurator or the library specified during the sign on process. Account String Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string for which to retrieve the description. The number of account segments are based upon the number specified in the user's Ledger Specifics Settings. Formula Examples: =GXD(,"001","310","6000","005") Retrieves the account description for the account string Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

159 GL Reporting 7.17 Jack Henry JH Sign On 151 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Jack Henry ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box appears. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries sign on Password - standard iseries password 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

160 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 JH Ledger Specifics Jack Henry Silverlake Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry Silverlake panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Jack Henry Silverlake Options: Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger. Use Alternate Open Balance If selected, an alternate opening balance calculation is performed resolving Calculation (CMEB1 - CMTD1) a Retained Earnings/Consolidation issue in BEGCYR fields. Jack Henry Silverlake Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Jack Henry 20/20

161 GL Reporting 153 Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Jack Henry 20/20 panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Jack Henry 20/20 Options: Current Year Specify the current accounting year in the ledger. Jack Henry 20/20 Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

162 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 JH Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Jack Henry ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE, CURBAL, YESBAL, BUDGETA and BUDGETB. CIF 20/20 valid values are ACTUAL, AGGREGATE, AVERAGE, CBAL, YESBAL, BUDGETA, and BUDGETB. Time Span Click the down arrow and select the time span for which to retrieve data. Silverlake valid values are CURRENT, PRIOR1, PRIOR2 and FUTURE. CIF 20/20 valid values are CURRENT and PRIOR1. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. This field is for informational purposes only. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Level Click the down arrow and select the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

163 GL Reporting JH GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Jack Henry ledger. Syntax - Silverlake: =GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5") Syntax - CIF 20/20: =GXL("Data Type","Time Span","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Data Type Identifies the type of data to retrieve. Valid data types are: Data Type Description Silverlake CIF 20/20 ACTUAL Actual period to date data * * AGGREGATE Sum of daily balances * * AVERAGE Aggregate total divided by number of days * Note: This data type only applies when Format = PER. CURBAL Current daily balance * CBAL Current daily balance YESBAL Yesterday balance * * BUDGETA Budget balances * * BUDGETB Budget balances * * * Time Span Identifies the time span for data to retrieve. Valid time spans are: Time Span Description Silverlake CIF 20/20 CURRENT Current Year * * PRIOR1 Prior Year * * PRIOR2 2 Years Prior * FUTURE Future Year * Key 3 Identifies the level and the optional alternate library to be used. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "LEVEL=X" where X is the account posting level. Zero indicates detail level account, 1-8 indicates roll up level account, and blank includes all account levels. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library. Year Year identifier. For information purposes only (not used in the actual calculation). May enter 0. Global Software, Inc.

164 156 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-5 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger (i.e. Silverlake = Bank, Branch, Account, Cost Center, Product Code; CIF 20/20 = Branch, Account). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Silverlake - Using Single Values: =GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","1"," ","0","0") Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string. Formula Example - CIF 20/20 - Using Single Values: =GXL("ACTUAL","CURRENT","LEVEL=0","0","PER","8","1","11200") Retrieves the actual balance for period 8 of the current year for a single account string. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

165 GL Reporting JH GXD For a Jack Henry ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account String") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account String Identifies the account string for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Silverlake: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string (BANK-BRANCH-ACCOUNT-COST CENTER-PRODUCT CODE). Formula Example - CIF 20/20: =GXD(" ") Retrieves the account description for the account string (BRANCH-ACCOUNT). Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

166 158 Spreadsheet Server - Version JD Edwards JDE Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a JD Edwards (JDE) ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The JD Edwards Login dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Pre-defined Connection User Name: User ID - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Retrieve account balances from local database Option 2 - <Sign-On>: User ID - standard database sign on Password - standard database password Retrieve account balances from local database 4. When the Retrieve account balances from local database option is selected, click More... and specify the following: Local Database Type - indicates the database type and connection or database path Work in Local Mode without a connection Note: When working without a connection, the user only has access to account balances in the local database file. As a result drill downs to journals, GXEs to journals, GXDs for company and business unit, and list accounts will not be functional. In addition, JDE security is not utilized; however, the system continues to verify that the user is a valid Spreadsheet Server user, thus the user must have the Configurator on their hard drive. 5. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

167 GL Reporting JDE Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - JD Edwards panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description JD Edwards Processing Options: Number of Decimal Positions for Amounts Specify the number of positions to move the decimal when displaying dollar amounts. Ex: JDE stores the amount as a whole number (i.e ), thus when a '2' is entered for this option, Spreadsheet Server would display the amount as Alternate Language Code Specify the alternative language from the F0901D file to be used for displaying account descriptions. Leave the field blank to retrieve account descriptions from the F0901 file. Limit Segment Lookup Results If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment value to nnnn Records lookup (i.e. Locate Segment panel, or when click the ellipse button for an account segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number of records specified. Category Codes: Set Value to Upper Case Global Software, Inc. If field values (i.e. business unit and account category codes) are set to upper case for calculation purposes.

168 160 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Drill Down: Display Blank or Null Dates as 1/1/1900 Description If selected, blank or null dates are displayed as 1/1/1900 on various drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expanded reports. If not selected, blank or null dates appear as blank. Journal Drill Down: Do Not If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expanded Include MA Code and MA Type reports exclude MA Code and MA Type fields as data output. Fields Journal Drill Down: Do Not Include GLAID Field (Outsider Lease) If selected, journal drill downs and GXE journal entry detail expanded reports exclude the GLALID (Outsider Lease/Well ID) field as data output. Journal Entry Drill Down: View Click the down arrow and select the type of journal entries to display on Preference the journal entry drill down panel. Valid values are Posted Entries Only, Unposted Entries Only, and Both Posted and Unposted Default Configuration Click the down arrow and select the configuration to be defaulted on the Build a Template and the Control Panel panels. JD Edwards Batch Types: Accounts Payable / Accounts Receivable / Inventory Specify the single character batch type codes used for the applicable subsystems. Choices should be separated by a comma. JD Edwards Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

169 GL Reporting JDE Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Note: In Demo Mode the value is hard coded to GXL Demo. Ledger Type Click the down arrow and select the ledger type code containing the balances. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currency assigned in the user's SS Settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of period balances. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

170 162 Spreadsheet Server - Version JDE Formula Assistant for GXL As fields on the Formula Assistant - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a JDE ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Formula Assistant section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Configuration Specify the host configuration to be used. Ledger Type Specify the ledger type code containing the balances. Year Specify the reporting year. Format Specify the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, RANGE, BLTD, BLTDAPR, BLTDREQ. Period Specify the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify a valid currency code. Leave blank to use the base currency assigned in the user's SS Settings. Enter * to retrieve all currencies. BU Status Code If selected, the business unit status code is included as part of the formula criteria. Note: When the Budget Manager option is selected, the BU Status Code option may not be selected.

171 GL Reporting 163 Field Description Blank / Not Blank / Value When BU Status Code is selected, specify whether to compare the business unit status code to blank, not blank or a value. Specific valid values are K, N, and P (or the cell reference containing the value). Note: When a specific value is entered, double quotes are not required around the value. Budget Manager If selected, the formula retrieves budget amounts which have been loaded into Spreadsheet Server from Global's Budget Manager. Note: When the BU Status Code option is selected, the Budget Manager option may not be selected. Budget Name / Budget Version When Budget Manager is selected, specify the budget name and budget version number (or the cell reference containing the values) from which to retrieve budget data. Weekly If selected, the formula retrieves weekly balances instead of period balances. Invert Sign If selected, the account balance sign displayed is reversed. Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

172 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GXSALES panel. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be totaled. Total Type Click the down arrow and select the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary. Criteria Click the down arrow and select the field(s) to be used as filtering criteria for the formula. Value Cell Specify the cell location containing the selection value for the corresponding criteria field. Retrieve Data from Sales History If selected, the formula retrieves data from the Sales History file (F42119). File (F42119) Otherwise, data is retrieved from the Sales Order Detail file (F4211). Click the link to go to a related topic: Formula Assistant or JDE GXSALES.

173 GL Reporting JDE GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a JDE ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Configuration","Ledger Type","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5","Account Segment 6") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve account balances. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Ledger Type Identifies the ledger type code containing the account balances. May be a single value, mask or value list (no excludes allowed); however, a mask or value list is not supported when processing in local mode. Key 3 Identifies currency and balance type, and optionally identifies the business unit status and/or Budget Manager name/ revision. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. If not specified, the system uses the base currency from the user's SS Settings. Enter '*' to retrieve all currencies. Note: In JDE currency amounts are stored in one of two fields, GBCRCX or GBCRCD. If the formula is not returning values, insert an X before the currency. Ex: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=XUSD";"WEEKLY=FALSE","2012","PER","1","00001","1","1110","FIB") Enter the literal "WEEKLY=NNNN" where NNNN is either TRUE or FALSE. Enter the literal "BUSTATUS=NNNN" where NNNN is either BLANK, NOTBLANK, K, N or P. Enter the literal "BUDGETNAME=NNNN" and "BUDGETREVISION=XXX where NNNN is the budget name and XXX is the budget revision. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified BLTD Activity for period 1 thru the designated period number including the original budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) BLTDAPR Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the approved budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) BLTDREQ Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the requested budget amount (Budget Ledger Type) Global Software, Inc.

174 166 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Ledger Type Format Period(s) Results Actual PER 0 Budget ANY 55 Retrieves beginning original budget amount Budget ANY 56 Retrieves beginning approved budget amount Budget ANY 57 Retrieves beginning requested budget amount Actual or Budget PER, QTR or RANGE X.X Pulls activity for a range of periods where X.X represents the beginning and ending range of period numbers Retrieves balance forward amount Account Segment 1-6 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Business Unit, Object, Subsidiary, Subledger Type, Subledger). The company, business unit and object are required elements. May be a single value, BLANK value, NOTBLANK value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Single Values: =GXL("1","AA","CURRENCY=***";"WEEKLY=FALSE","1998","PER","6","00001","1","1110","FIB","*","*") Retrieves the activity for period 9 of 1998 using ledger type AA for account string FIB for all subledgers. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

175 GL Reporting JDE GXD For a JDE ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account string, or company or business unit segment. Syntax: =GXD("Configuration","Value","Description Type") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Value If description type is Account String (AC), identifies the account string. If description type is Company (CO), identifies the company. If description type is Business Unit (BU), identifies the business unit. Description Type Identifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account String (AC), Company (CO), and Business Unit (BU). Formula Example - Retrieve an Account String Description: =GXD("1"," FIB","AC") Retrieves the account description for the account string FIB. Global Software, Inc.

176 168 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Example - Retrieve a Company Description: =GXD("1","00001","CO") Retrieves the description for company Formula Example - Retrieve a Business Unit Description: =GXD("1","1","BU") Retrieves the description for business unit 1. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

177 GL Reporting JDE GXSALES Use the GXSALES formula to retrieve sales totals based upon sales criteria. Sales data may be retrieved from either the Sales Order Detail file (F4211) or the Sales Order History file (F42119). Syntax: =GXSALES("Configuration","Total Field","Total Type","Retrieve Data from Sales History File","Criteria 01","Criteria 02","Criteria 03","Criteria 04","Criteria 05","Criteria 06","Criteria 07") Parameters: Configuration Identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve sales totals. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. Total Field Identifies the related sales field to be totaled. Total field options are: Description Table.Field Extended Cost F4211.SDECST Extended Price F4211.SDAEXP Gross Weight F4211.SDGRWT Open Amount F4211.SDAOPN Qty Backordered F4211.SDSOBK Qty Canceled F4211.SDSOCN Qty Committed F4211.SDSONE Qty Open F4211.SDUOPN Qty Ordered F4211.SDUORG Qty Shipped F4211.SDSOQS Qty Shipped To-Date F4211.SDQTYT Trade Discount F4211.SDTRDC Total Type Identifies the type of total to be calculated. Valid types are Average, Count, Maximum, Minimum, and Summary. Criteria / Value Identifies up to 7 criteria parameters and the associated value to be used for selecting data. The list of available selection criteria fields is maintained in the Configurator by the administrator. Retrieve Data from Sales History File Identifies to retrieve data from the sales history file (F42119) instead of the sales order detail file (F4211). Formula Example - GXSALES Extended Price - Average Sales: =GXSALES(1, "F4211.SDAEXP","AVG","SALES;HISTORY=YES","F4211.SDTRDJ D","6/01/1998.6/30/1998","F4211.SDMCU B12","30","F4211.SDDCTO A02","SO") Retrieves the average sales totals from sales history file F42119 for order date range 6/1/1998 to 6/30/1998. Global Software, Inc.

178 170 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Click the link to go to a related topic: JDE Formula Assistant for GXSALES.

179 GL Reporting JDE GXSALES Drill Down Once GXSALES formulas are constructed, drill down capability to the sales detail related to the amount, quantity or weight exists. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. Additionally, GXSALES criteria in the Configurator determines whether or not a field appears in the Sales Detail drill down grid. 1. Select a cell containing a GXSALES formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Sales Detail drill down appears showing the associated sales detail from the F4211, F4101 and F0101 files. Nav Tip: The drill down data may also be pushed directly to a panel or work sheet by selecting the SS Ribbon equivalent. Global Software, Inc.

180 172 Spreadsheet Server - Version JDE Fixed Asset Balances Global delivers Designer GL definitions, JDE_iSeries_FXA, JDE_Oracle_FXA and JDE_SQL_FXA, for retrieving JDE fixed asset account balances from the F1202 file. In addition, associated ad hoc queries are delivered for drilling down from JDE_FXA Designer GL GXL account balances to asset details. Below is a high level summary of the steps required for setting up and using a JDE_FXA Designer GL. To Setup and Process a JDE_FXA Designer GL: 1. Application Configurator>Application Settings>JD Edwards -- ensure the appropriate JDE host connection(s) is created. Contact your administrator for more information. Note: JDE host connection(s) created function for both the standard JDE ledger and JDE_FXA Designer GL. 2. Spreadsheet Server Settings>General -- verify the General Ledger Type = JD Edwards. 3. Spreadsheet Server Settings>File Locations -- verify the Ad Hoc Queries and Designer GL Definition file locations. 4. Spreadsheet Server Settings>Ledger Specific>Designer GL -- ensure the proper host connection is assigned to the JDE_FXA Designer GL definition being used, and set the appropriate default Designer GL definition. 5. On the Control Panel or Build a Template panels, criteria defaults to JDE parameters; however, to process for the JDE_FXA Designer GL, select the appropriate Designer GL definition and criteria on the panel will change accordingly. Continue processing as normal.

181 GL Reporting JDE FASTR Report Conversion For JDE World customers only (iseries), Spreadsheet Server offers a utility to convert FASTR report definitions into Excel workbook formats. Using the template provided, users can select the FASTR program number and revision via the Get Report lookup feature and convert the report to Excel format. 1. From Windows Explorer, navigate to C:\Documents and Settings\Users\Public\Public Documents\Global Software Inc\Spreadsheet Server\Components. Open the Excel spreadsheet named JDE Fastr Template and enable the macros. The spreadsheet loads and a new menu called FASTR is added to Excel. 2. In Excel from the FASTR menu, select Get Reports. The Host Signon for Reports dialog box appears. 3. On the Signon dialog box identify the host name, user ID and password, and click Sign On. The FASTR Reports panel appears. 4. On the FASTR Reports panel, specify the name of the library containing the FASTR reports and click Show Reports. A list of reports appears. Global Software, Inc.

182 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Double click on the desired report (Program ID and Version ID) to be converted. The conversion process creates an Excel workbook using the Program ID and Version ID as the name and stores it in the location identified at the bottom of the FASTR Reports panel.

183 GL Reporting 7.19 Lawson Lawson Sign On 175 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Lawson ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Option 2 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

184 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Lawson Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Lawson panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Lawson Options: Apply SQL Trim to Account Segments If selected, the system automatically applies the TRIM function to all account segments when processing. Lawson Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

185 GL Reporting Lawson Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Lawson ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual Dollars), B (Budget Dollars), AU (Actual Units), BU (Budget Units), ADBP (Average Daily Balance Period), ADBQ (Average Daily Balance Quarter) and ADBY (Average Daily Balance Year). Budget # When Balance Type is B or BU, specify the budget number. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

186 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Lawson GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Lawson ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget #","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), AU (Actual Units), B (Budget), BU (Budget Units), ADBP (Average Daily Balance Period), ADBQ (Average Daily Balance Quarter) and ADBY (Average Daily Balance Year). Budget # Identifies the budget number. This value is required if Balance Type is either B or BU. Key 3 Not used currently. Enter 0. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-5 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Account Unit, Account, Sub-Account, Chart of Accounts). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","6044*","3*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 6044 and all accounts starting with 3.

187 GL Reporting 179 Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A",,"0","2005","PER","12","10","5500*"," ","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 12 of 2005 for company 10, account units starting with 5500 and all accounts in the range of thru Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

188 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Lawson GXD For a Lawson ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Account","Sub Account","Chart Name") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Account Identifies the account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Sub Account Identifies the sub account value of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Chart Name Identifies the name of the chart of accounts from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if the specified account string only exists in one chart of accounts. Formula Example: =GXD("40100","0","DCHHEALTHSYS") Retrieves the segment description for account and sub-account 0. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

189 GL Reporting 7.20 Movex Movex Sign On 181 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a Movex ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. On the Sign On dialog box specify the following information: Host Name or IP Address - iseries system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library or catalog containing the General Ledger data User Name - standard iseries or SQL Server sign on Password - standard iseries or SQL Server password 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection. Global Software, Inc.

190 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Movex Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Movex panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Movex Options: Chart of Accounts by Division If selected, accounts in Movex are division specific. Otherwise, accounts in Movex are not division specific. Use RVFRFN for Budget Data (Older Movex Versions) If selected, budget names/data are retrieved from RVFRFN. Drill Down: By Balance Key If selected, drill downs use the balance key specified on the GXL formula. Otherwise, drill downs use a balance key of 8. Drill Down: Include Third Currency Amount If selected, drill downs include the third currency amount. Period Type for Retrieving Begin/End Dates Specify the period type to be used for retrieving beginning and ending dates for the company/division. Period types are defined in the CSYPER table in the Movex database. Dimension Number Used for Account Descriptions Specify the dimension number to be used for retrieving the account description when processing a GXD formula. Journal Entry Drill Down: Max Dimensions Specify the maximum number of dimensions to be used when drilling down to journal entry detail. Valid values are 0-7. Movex Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

191 GL Reporting Movex Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a Movex ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Budget Number If applicable, specify the budget number from which to retrieve data. Leave blank to retrieve actual data. Budget Revision If applicable, specify the budget revision from which to retrieve data. Entry is required if a budget number is specified. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Balance Key Click the down arrow and select the balance key to be used to retrieve data. Stat Enter a Y to return statistic values; otherwise enter an N. Exchange Rate If applicable, click the down arrow and select the exchange rate to be multiplied by the balances to calculate the reporting amounts. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

192 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Movex GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a Movex ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Budget Number","Budget Revision","Key3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Budget Number Identifies the budget number. If left blank, actual data is retrieved. Budget Revision Identifies the budget revision. A budget revision is required if a budget number is specified. Key 3 Optionally identifies statistical data, alternate library, balance key, Budget Manager name/revision and/or exchange rate. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter the literal "STAT=Y" to indicate retrieval of statistical balances. Enter the literal "LIBRARY=NNNN" where NNNN is the name of the alternate library. Enter the literal "BALANCE KEY=XX" where XX is the balance key. Enter the literal "BUDGET:NNNN:XX" where NNNN is the budget name and XX is the budget revision. Enter the literal "EXCHRATE=NNNN" where NNNN is the exchange rate. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-9 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Company, Division, Dimension 1-7). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","51*","*","*","*") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts starting with 51 using balance key 8.

193 GL Reporting 185 Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL(,,"STAT=N";"BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA"," ") Retrieves the monetary activity for period 4 of 2004 for accounts 5100 thru 5500 using balance key 8. Formula Example - Retrieving Budget Data: =GXL("1","1","BALANCE KEY=8","2004","PER","4","210","AAA","5710","*","*","*") Retrieves the budget balance for period 4 of 2004 for an account mask using balance key 8, for Budget Number 1 and Budget Revision 1. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values. Global Software, Inc.

194 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Movex GXD For a Movex ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve an account description for a single account string. Syntax: =GXD("Company","Division","Dimension Number","Dimension Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Company Identifies the company. Division Identifies the division. Dimension Number Identifies the dimension number associated with the dimension value. Dimension Value Identifies the dimension value for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example: =GXD("210","AAA","1","5710") Retrieves the account description for company 210, division AAA and dimension 1 value of Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

195 GL Reporting 7.21 Oracle Oracle Sign On 187 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for an Oracle ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel start up, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 thru 6 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Login dialog box appears. 3. Two methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server: Option 1 - Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Global Software, Inc.

196 188 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Option 2 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click Login. The Oracle Default Responsibility panel appears, displaying the Responsibility previously selected. 5. Click on the drop down arrow to select a different Responsibility. 6. Click Continue. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

197 GL Reporting Oracle Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel, or to access other functions. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Oracle Options: Select Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger or ledger set and responsibility to be used to adjust values on the panel (i.e. number of segments, segment labels, segment security, etc.). Right click and select Refresh to refresh the data. This value does not update the default responsibility for GXL formulas. Number of Segments Specify the number of segments which make up the account. This value is automatically filled by the Select Ledger selection. Segment Number Used for Descriptions Displays for the currently selected ledger the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Use the Set Segment Number for All Ledgers button to change the value for all ledgers -or- use the Segment Mapping button to change the value for a single ledger. Global Software, Inc.

198 190 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Language Specify the language to be used for account descriptions. Balance SQL Statement Hint by Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type (i.e. A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance) or P (Project)) and then in the adjacent field specify the user-defined index to be used with the associated balance type when processing Spreadsheet Server calculations. Use Summary Accounts If selected, summary accounts are included with non-summary accounts in the GXL formula calculation. Otherwise only non-summary accounts are used. This option only applies if the GXL Summary Accounts parameter is not specified or equals NA. Segments Displays the segment names for the ledger specified above. Oracle Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Button Function Segment Mapping Displays the Segment Mapping panel, allowing the user for each ledger to assign the segment number to be used for descriptions and to re-order account segments to match the order defined in the Oracle application (see Segment Mapping). Set Segment Number for All Ledgers Displays the Oracle Segment Number Used For Descriptions panel, allowing the user to assign the same segment number to be used for descriptions to all ledgers. This function is password protected. Add Sample Hint Inserts a sample index in the Balance SQL Statement Hint field. View Segment Security Displays any account restrictions based on the current sign-on ID and responsibility. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

199 GL Reporting Oracle Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an Oracle ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Note: When Balance Type = P, then Format should = PER. Balances retrieved are 'to-date' (i.e. running totals). In addition, drill down is only available to account balances, not to journals. Budget/En Type When Balance Type is B or E, click the down arrow and select the budget or encumbrance name. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Translated Click the down arrow and select whether to display entered or translated currency balances. Valid values are E (Entered), T (Translated), and M (Multiple Reporting Currencies). Note: E must be used if the selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Note: Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period. Global Software, Inc.

200 192 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Currency Specify a valid currency code. Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger or ledger set for which to retrieve data. Summary Accts Click the down arrow and select which account types to use. Valid values are NA (use Summary Accounts option from Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics to determine whether to include Summary Accounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only Non-Summary Accounts). FSG Report If desired, select the check box and then use the drop down box to select a FSG Report for which to create a Spreadsheet Server report. When this option is selected various fields on the panel will be disabled. Convert Missing Values to Parent Hierarchies When FSG Templates is selected, this option becomes enabled. If selected, missing single segment values are converted to parent hierarchies when the Spreadsheet Server report is created. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

201 GL Reporting Oracle GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for an Oracle ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Budget/EnType","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget), E (Encumbrance), and P (Project). Budget/En Type Identifies the budget or encumbrance name. This value is required if Balance Type is either E or B. Key 3 Optionally identifies translation type, currency, ledger, account type, and translated flag criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "TRANSLATED=X" where X is the translation type. Valid types are E (Entered in the selected currency), T (Translated to the selected currency), and M (Multiple reporting currencies). E must be used if the selected currency is the database's functionality currency or STAT. Prior to selecting T, ensure that the currency translation has been processed in Oracle for the selected currency and reporting period. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Enter the literal "BOOK=XXX" where XXX is the name of the ledger or ledger set to be used. If not specified, the system uses the default ledger identified on the SS Ribbon (Tools>Select Responsibility>xxx). Enter the literal "SUMMARY=XX" where XX indicates which account types to use. Valid values are NA (use Summary Accounts option from Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics to determine whether or not to include Summary Accounts with Non-Summary Accounts), Y (include only Summary Accounts), and N (include only Non-Summary Accounts). If not specified, NA is assumed. Enter the literal "TRANSLATEDFLAG=X" where X is the name of the translated flag to be used. Enter * to retrieve all records regardless of their assigned translated flag. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Global Software, Inc.

202 194 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS (USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*","1110","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for an account mask using Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A",,"TRANSLATED="E";"&"CURRENCY="USD";"&"BOOK="VISION OPERATIONS (USA)";"&"TRANSLATEDFLAG="*";","2003","PER","6","01","*"," ","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for accounts 1110 thru 1999 using Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

203 GL Reporting Oracle GXD For an Oracle ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Num","Value","Ledger") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Num Identifies the segment number of the account string for which to retrieve the description. Value Identifies the value of the account segment for which to retrieve the description. Ledger Identifies the ledger (a.k.a. set of books) from which to retrieve the description. Entry is optional if only one ledger is referenced in the workbook. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("3","1110","Vision Operations (USA)") Retrieves the description for segment 3 value 1110 from the Vision Operations (USA) set of books. Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD(("1","01")& "-" &GXD("3","1640") Retrieves the description for segment 1 value 01 and concatenates the description for segment 3 value Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

204 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Segment Mapping Account segments may be re-ordered in the Oracle application. Use the following to re-order account segments in the Spreadsheet Server application to match the order defined in the Oracle application. In addition, use the Segment Mapping function to assign individually for each ledger (a.k.a. set of books) the segment number to be used for retrieving descriptions. Note: If segments are remapped, then standard delivered segment ad hoc queries will need to be modified. Contact Global for assistance. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Settings. The Spreadsheet Server Settings - General panel appears. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the Settings tab on the Control Panel. 2. From the navigation panel, select Ledger Specifics>Oracle. The Ledger Specifics - Oracle panel appears. 3. On the Oracle panel, click the Segment Mapping button. The Segment Mapping panel appears. 4. On the Segment Mapping panel, use the appropriate drop down boxes to specify the following data: Ledger - Identify the ledger for which to assign the segment number for descriptions or to map/re-order account segments in Spreadsheet Server. The system will modify the available account segments based upon the selected ledger. Segment Number Used for Descriptions (SEGMENT X) - Identify the segment number to be used for retrieving account descriptions on drill down panels and when processing GXE formulas. Account Segments - Identify the proper segment number for each account segment. 5. Click the Save button to write the changes. 6. Repeat steps 4 and 5, until changes have been made for each ledger. 7. To exit the panel, click the Close button.

205 GL Reporting 7.22 PeopleSoft PSoft Sign On 197 Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a PeopleSoft ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When unattended (auto) sign on is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The Sign On to Spreadsheet Server dialog box. 3. Various methods are available for signing onto Spreadsheet Server based upon the connection protocol being used: Option 1 - SQL Server or DSN: Host Name or IP Address - system name or IP address that hosts the database Database Library - name of library containing the General Ledger data DSN Name - name of the DSN connection User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Option 2 - Oracle Direct Connect: Select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Host Name or IP Address - host or IP Address that hosts the database Service - Oracle Service Name indicating where the database is located Port - port number User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator Global Software, Inc.

206 198 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Option 3 - Oracle Client: Do not select the Direct check box Specify the following fields: Oracle Service Name - Service Name configured via the Oracle Net Manager User Name - defaults the Application User Name assigned to the user in the Configurator Password - only required if a password was created for the user in the Configurator 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

207 GL Reporting PSoft Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - PeopleSoft panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description PeopleSoft Options: Set ID Specify the PeopleSoft set ID. Drill Down: Apply Effective Date Criteria If selected, drill downs include the effective date as part of the search criteria. Multi-Column Drill Down: Ignore Ledger If selected, multi-column drill downs ignore the ledger account segment parameter. Available Business Units for User Displays the business units available for the current user. PeopleSoft Build a Template Options: QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

208 200 Spreadsheet Server - Version PSoft Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for a PeopleSoft ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Balance Type Click the down arrow and select the balance type. Valid values are A (Actual), B (Budget), and E (Encumbrance). Business Unit Specify the reporting business unit. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Currency Specify the reporting currency code. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template.

209 GL Reporting PSoft GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a PeopleSoff ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Balance Type","Business Unit","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Balance Type Identifies the balance type. Valid types are A (Actual), B (Budget, and E (Encumbrance). Business Unit Identifies the business unit. Key 3 Optionally identifies currency. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "CURRENCY=XXX" where XXX is the name of the currency to be used. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified OBAL or OPE Opening balance (i.e. period 0). Note: Any period value entered is ignored. CBAL or CLO Year to date activity including closing balances and/or adjusting entries (i.e. period 0-54). Note: Any period value entered is ignored. BP Budget amount for the selected period Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1-10 Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string (i.e. Ledger, Fund Code, Department, Class Field, Program Code, Chart Field 1, Account, Project, Affiliate, Statistics Code). May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax). Global Software, Inc.

210 202 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Example - Using Masks: =GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*","20000","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, department and all accounts starting with 4. Formula Example - Using a Range: =GXL("A","US005","CURRENCY=USD","2003","PER","6","LOCAL","*"," ","*","*","*","400000","*","*","*") Retrieves the actual activity for period 6 of 2003 for business unit US005, ledger LOCAL, departments in the range of thru 21999, and account Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

211 GL Reporting PSoft GXD For a PeopleSoft ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment. Syntax: =GXD("Segment Value") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Segment Value Identifies the segment value for which to retrieve the description. Formula Example - Using a Single Segment: =GXD("402000") Retrieves the description for account segment Formula Example - Using Multiple Segments: =GXD("402000")& "-" &GXD("3000") Retrieves the description for account segment and concatenates the description for project segment Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant. Global Software, Inc.

212 204 Spreadsheet Server - Version SAP SAP Sign On Follow the steps below to start the add-in component of Spreadsheet Server for a SAP ledger. When user's SS Settings are set to start Spreadsheet Server during Excel startup, then step 2 is not applicable. When single signon is activated, steps 3 and 4 are not applicable. The dialog boxes used to sign onto Spreadsheet Server are determined by the connection type assigned to the host configuration in the Configurator. 1. Start Excel. 2. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Disabled (or click the associated down arrow and click Enable). The SAP Logon dialog box appears. 3. On the SAP Logon dialog box specify the following information: Option 1 - Using Legacy SAP GUI connection type: From the list of SAP systems in your organization, select the desired system to sign onto. Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language. Option 2 - Using SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type: Specify the Client, User ID, Password and Language. Select Remember Me to retain the User ID and Password. If necessary, click the System button, and select the desired system to sign onto. 4. Click OK. Click the link to go to a related topic: Sign On, Control Panel, Disable/Enable Formula Calculations or Reset Host Server Connection.

213 GL Reporting SAP Ledger Specifics Use the table to enter data on the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the SS Settings section to review generic processing fields. Field Description SAP Options: Language (SPRAS) Specify the language ID to be used for all descriptions. Client Specify the SAP client number. This value is updated during signon. Note: This only applies when using a Legacy SAP GUI host configuration. Limit Segment Lookup Results If selected, the number of segment records loaded during a segment value to nnnn Records lookup (i.e. when click the ellipse button for an account segment on the Build a Template or Control Panel panel) is limited by the number of records specified. Use Optimized Array for SQL (NetCo 3.0) If selected, the SAP Adapter sends back results in an array/table with length optimized for the results being returned, in an effort to reduce network traffic going between Excel and SAP. SAP Build a Template Options: FI QuickText Global Software, Inc. Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the FI ledger for building a GXL formula.

214 206 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. CO QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the CO ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. COOR QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the COOR ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. PCA QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>General Ledger sub menu to identify the PCA ledger for building a GXL formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. SAP RFC Trace Options: Note: These options only apply when using a NetCo 3.0 SAP host configuration. Enable RFC Trace If selected, indicates to run the SAP RFC trace and create the appropriate trace logs. When selected additional options become available. Default Trace Level Click the down arrow and select the trace level to be run. The higher the level, the more tracing data collected. CPIC Trace Level Click the down arrow and select the trace level to be run. The higher the level, the more detailed the tracing data collected. Trace Directory Key the path or use the Browse button to specify the location of the trace logs. SAP User Authorizations: Authorized Companies Displays a list of companies to which the current user is authorized. These values are updated during signon. Currency Precisions Displays a list of each currency setup within SAP and its' applicable currency precision. These values are updated during signon. Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP T-Codes. The list only displays SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type configurations. T-Code List Displays a list of SAP T-Codes for the selected configuration. Data in the grid may be filtered or re-sorted as necessary. To pin favorite or most often used T-Codes to the SS Ribbon Query>SAP TCodes drop down list, select the Pinned option for each desired T-Code. Note: After mak ing changes to pinned settings, save the changes and then from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>SAP T-Codes to repopulate the list of pinned T-Codes displayed on the ribbon. See Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXD Formula for more information. Note: The Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP - Special Ledgers panel is used to maintain processing criteria for special SAP ledgers. This panel is password protected. Contact Global for more information. Click the link to go to a related topic: SS Settings.

215 GL Reporting SAP Build a Template for GXL As fields on the Build a Template - GXL panel vary based upon the selected ledger, use the table to enter data unique for an SAP ledger. A link is available at the bottom of the table to go to the Build a Template section to review generic processing fields. Field Description Ledger Click the down arrow and select the ledger. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Use the drop down list to select the appropriate value. After selecting a value, the system changes the account segments and valid currency types on the panel to match the selected ledger. Currency Type Click the down arrow and select the currency type. Valid values vary based upon the ledger selected. If ledger = FI, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, and GROUP. If ledger = CO or COOR, valid values are TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, and FIXEDQTY. If ledger = PCA, valid values are TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, and QTY. Year Click the down arrow and select the reporting year. Format Click the down arrow and select the time range for which to retrieve data. Valid formats are PER, QTR, DQTR, YTD, LTD, and RANGE. Period Click the down arrow and select the corresponding period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Click the link to go to a related topic: Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

216 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 SAP GXL Use the GXL formula to retrieve account balances for a specific format/reporting period. The following is an overview for the GXL formula for a SAP ledger. Syntax: =GXL("Ledger","Currency Type","Key 3","Year","Format","Period","Account Segment 1","Account Segment 2","Account Segment 3","Account Segment 4","Account Segment 5"...) Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXL formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Ledger Identifies the specific ledger in SAP. Valid values are FI, CO, COOR, PCA and special SAP ledgers. Currency Type Identifies the currency type. Ledger Valid Values FI TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP CO TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY COOR TRANS, OBJECT, COAREA, PV, TOTALQTY, FIXEDQTY PCA TRANS, LOCAL, GROUP, QTY Key 3 Optionally identifies host configuration criteria. Enter the necessary literal and a value as defined below. If more than one variable needs to be defined, separate the variables by a semi-colon. Enter 0 or leave blank if not used. Enter the literal "CONFIGURATION=X" where X is either the full configuration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Year Year identifier. Format Format options are: PER Activity for the selected period QTR Activity for the periods included in the selected quarter number DQTR Activity for the periods included in the selected daily quarter number YTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number excluding the opening balance LTD Activity for periods 1 thru the designated period number including the opening balance RANGE Activity for a range of periods specified Period Corresponds to period, quarter number, or range of periods (i.e. 1.5 for periods 1 thru 5) for the specified format. Account Segment 1 - nn Enter one parameter for each segment of the account string. The number of account segments will vary based upon the account structure for the selected ledger. May be a single value, mask, range, value list, segment list, hierarchy value field (see Account Segment Syntax).

217 GL Reporting 209 Ledger Valid Segments FI Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Account, Business Area CO Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, Cost Center, Cost Element, Activity COOR Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Value Type, Controlling Area, Order Number, Cost Element PCA Type, Chart of Accounts, Plan Version, Currency Code, Company, Profit Center, Function Area, Controlling Area, Account Type - valid values are 0 (Actual) and 1 (Plan) Plan Version - use 000 if actual results are desired Formula Example - FI Ledger - Using a Value List, Range and Mask: =GXL("FI","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","[1000,2000]", " ","*") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for companies 1000 and 2000, accounts in the range of thru , and all business areas. Formula Example - CO Ledger - Using Single Values: =GXL("CO","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=SAP 1 - Prod","1999","PER","1","INT","000","DEM","01","1000","2000", "435000","100") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 1999 for controlling area 1000, cost center 2000, cost element and activity 100. Global Software, Inc.

218 210 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Example - COOR Ledger - Using Single Values: =GXL("COOR","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2003","PER","2","1000","000","USD","01","1000"," ", " ") Retrieves the actual balance for period 2 of 2003 for controlling area 1000, order number and cost element Formula Example - PCA Ledger - Using a Value List, Masks and a Range: =GXL("PCA","TRANS","CONFIGURATION=1","2007","PER","1","0","1000","000","DEM","2000","9999","100","1000", "800000") Retrieves the actual balance for period 1 of 2007 for company 2000, profit centers 5000 and 9999, all function areas, range of controlling areas from 1000 thru 2500, and accounts that begin with 80. Click the link to go to a related topic: Control Panel, GL Reporting, Formula Assistant or GXL Formula for Account Values.

219 GL Reporting SAP GXD For a SAP ledger, the GXD formula is used to retrieve a description for a single account segment (i.e. account, cost center, internal order, profit center). Syntax: =GXD("Descriptions","Parm 1","Parm 2","Parm 3") Note: It is most common to use cell references within GXD formulas to identify parameters. Parameters: Descriptions Identifies the segment type for which to retrieve a description. Valid values are Account (ACCOUNT), Cost Center (CC), Internal Order (IO), and Profit Center (PC). Parm 1 If description is Account (ACCOUNT), identifies the chart of accounts. If description is Cost Center (CC) or Profit Center (PC), identifies the controlling area. If description is Internal Order (IO), then leave the field blank. Parm 2 Identifies the value of the account, cost center, order number, or profit center for which to retrieve the description. Parm 3 Optionally, identifies the host configuration from which to retrieve the description. May specify either the full configuration name or just the number. If left blank, the system uses the default configuration as defined in the Configurator. Formula Example - Retrieve an Account Description: =GXD("ACCOUNT","INT","430000","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for account from the INT chart of accounts. Global Software, Inc.

220 212 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Example - Retrieve a Cost Center Description: =GXD("CC","1000","1200","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for cost center 1200 from the 1000 controlling area. Formula Example - Retrieve an Internal Order Description: =GXD("IO",,"702267","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for internal order Formula Example - Retrieve a Profit Center Description: =GXD("PC","1000","1010","SAP 1 - Prod") Retrieves the description for profit center 1010 from the 1000 controlling area. Click the link to go to a related topic: GL Reporting or Formula Assistant.

221 Query Query Summary of Query Formulas for Excel Spreadsheet Server retrieves data from the assigned database into Excel using the following formulas: Formula Description GEXQ Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet. This value may be "drilled down" upon to see the detailed results in a drill down panel or on a worksheet (see GEXQ Formulas). GEXD Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). GEXS Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas). GEXI Opens the detail portion of the query and displays results in a drill down panel or on a worksheet (see GEXI Formulas). Note: Formulas available for processing are based upon the user's licensed features. See GL Reporting for GL related formulas. These formulas can be used in a spreadsheet cell in the same manner as other spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet Server provides tools for starting a spreadsheet (see Build a Template) and for entering formulas (see Formula Assistant). Setup Prior to using Query Formulas in Excel For Standard Queries: 1. Queries must exist in Query Designer or Query Exchange before they can be used in formulas in Excel. Use one of the following methods to create/add a query to Query Designer: Download a query from Query Exchange (see Download Queries from Query Exchange) Manually create a query in Query Designer (see Create a New Query) 2. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>Queries. The system refreshes query data. For SAP Queries (SQ00): 1. Queries must exist in the SAP database. 2. In the Configurator, both selected users and SAP host configurations must be set to allow the execution of SAP queries. Global Software, Inc.

222 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Build a Template for Queries Build a Template is a tool used to aid in quickly creating a template on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. This tool populates the necessary rows and columns with required parameters as provided by the user. The tool inserts a GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, or GEXI formula using the parameters. Formulas available in the Build a Template function are based upon the user's licensed features. The availability of the SAP Explorer button on the GEXS and GEXI panels and the Search Online button is based upon user and/or connection authority settings in the Configurator. Note: See Build a Template for GL related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Build a Template. The Build a Template panel appears opening to the last used formula. Nav Tip: The Build a Template - GEXQ or GEXD panel may be accessed and pre-populated by selecting from the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query and then selecting the desired GEXQ or GEXD query. Only queries with a GEXQ or GEXD Quick Text defined will be available for selection (see Quick Text Panel). 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. 3. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXQ panel. Field Description GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field Click the down arrow and select the field to be used for summarizing. Only fields assigned an alias in the query appear in the drop down list. If left blank, the system uses the GEXQ summary field assigned in the query. Total Type Click the down arrow and select the operation to be applied to the Total Field (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX, etc.). If left blank, the system uses the GEXQ summary type assigned in the query.

223 Query Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXD panel. Field Description GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the T-Code or SAP query (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data. Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Global Software, Inc.

224 216 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Clear Sheet/Range/Table 6. Description If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXS panel. Field Description GEXS: Opens a selector panel based upon query results (see GEXS Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the SAP query (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer). Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s).

225 Query Use the table to enter data on the Build a Template - GEXI panel. Field Description GEXI: Displays query detail in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Click the SAP Explorer button ( ) to search for and select the SAP query (SQ00) to be executed (see SAP Explorer). 8. Use the table to enter data in the bottom section of the Build a Template - GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panel. Field Description Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the formula. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Column/Row Specify the starting column and row for the formula template. Use Absolute Cell References If selected, the system automatically locks both the column and row values of the query's parameter cell references. If not selected, the system only locks the column value when the parameter is assigned to a row or the row value when the parameter is assigned to a column. Line Description Specify a description to be assigned to the formula. This value is placed in the cell prior to the cell containing the formula. Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is cleared prior to inserting data. Do Not Clear Worksheet If selected, the target worksheet is not cleared prior to inserting data. Shift Worksheet Data If selected, the formula is inserted in the target cell and the parameter columns and rows are inserted to the top and to the left of the existing worksheet data. Parameters: The parameter related fields only appear when parameters have been specified in the selected query definition. Display/Use If selected, the query parameter is included in the formula. When the selected query is a SAP T-Code or SAP query (SQ00): The system defaults to select required parameters (indicated by red description) and parameters with a default value. A maximum of 25 parameters may be selected for processing. Global Software, Inc.

226 218 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Row/Col Select the button to toggle between Row and Col. This button determines if the query parameter will be located on the row to the left of the formula or in a column above the formula. Value Key the value (i.e. single value, wildcard, list, range, or segment list) or click the ellipse button to execute the user defined "look up" query to select the value to default on the template for the query parameter (see Assign Query). When the selected query is a SAP T-Code or SAP query (SQ00): A value other than * must be entered for required parameters (indicated by red description). When a value is entered, the system automatically selects the associated Display/Use field for the parameter. No ellipse button is available. Thru Value 9. When the selected query is SAP T-Code or SAP query (SQ00) and the parameter is set to allow a selection range, key the ending range value for the parameter if desired. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet, and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Insert (button) -- inserts parameter labels and values and the formula to the selected worksheet and closes the panel. Close (button) -- closes the panel.

227 Query SAP Explorer The SAP Explorer panel allows the user to search either the T-Codes or queries built in SAP (SQ00), and then select the desired T-Code to be processed in a GEXD formula or select the desired SAP query to be processed in either an GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula. Prior to using a T-Code in Spreadsheet Server, the T-Code must be assigned to the appropriate SAP host configuration(s) in the Configurator. To Select a SAP T-Code for Processing: 1. From the Build a Template - GEXD panel, click the SAP Explorer button ( a Template>SAP T-Code. The SAP Explorer panel appears. 2. Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP T-Codes. The list only displays SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type configurations. 3. Select the desired T-Code by double clicking the T-Code in the list -or- selecting the T-Code in the list and clicking Next. A list of execution variants available for the selected T-Code appears. Global Software, Inc. ) -or- from the SS Ribbon select Build

228 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Select the desired execution variant: To view and/or modify the parameters to be used to process the T-Code -- select the desired execution variant by double clicking the execution variant in the list -or- selecting the execution variant in the list and clicking Next. The system selects the T-Code and execution variant, and returns to the Build a Template - GEXD listing all parameters for the selected variant. To process the T-Code using default parameters for an execution variant -- select the Run by Execution Variant option and if desired select an execution variant, then click Next. The system selects the T-Code and execution variant, and returns to the Build a Template - GEXD, where Execution Variant is the only parameter. To Select a SAP Query (SQ00) for Processing: 1. From the Build a Template - GEXD, GEXS or GEXI panels, click the SAP Explorer button ( Ribbon select Build a Template>SAP Query (SQ00). The SAP Explorer panel appears. ) -or- from the SS Note: When the panel is accessed from the SS Ribbon via Build a Template>SAP Query (SQ00), the system assumes it is processing a GEXD formula. 2. If necessary, click the SAP Query (SQ00) tab.

229 Query Use the table to enter data on the SAP Explorer - SAP Query (SQ00) panel. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP queries. The list only displays SAP configurations which are allowed to execute SAP queries (SQ00). Area Specify whether to list SAP queries from the Global or Standard area. User Group If desired, specify the user group from which to list SAP queries. The value may be a single value or mask. Search For If desired, specify the name of the SAP query to be listed. The value may be a single value or mask. Query List Displays a list of SAP queries meeting the search criteria. Data in the grid may be filtered or re-sorted as necessary. 4. Enter the desired search criteria and click the Browse button ( search criteria. 5. Select a query by double clicking the query in the list -or- selecting the query in the list and clicking Select. The system selects the query and returns to the appropriate Build a Template panel. Global Software, Inc. ). The system lists the SAP queries meeting the

230 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Formula Assistant for Queries The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating formulas on a Spreadsheet Server spreadsheet. Formulas available in the Formula Assistant function are based upon the user's licensed features. The availability of the Search Online and Search for SAP Query (SQ00) buttons are based upon user and/or connection authority settings in the Configurator. Note: See Build a Template for GL related formulas. 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant opens to the GXL or GEXQ panel -or- if Formula Assistant was launched while on a SS formula, the corresponding formula panel appears. 2. Select the desired formula on the Formulas fly out window. The selected formula panel appears. Note: For efficient processing use cell references to identify individual query parameters. However, if literal values are k eyed in the entry boxes, they must be placed in double quotes ("). Hint: Shortcut for selecting cell references: On the Formula Assistant panel, select the desired field. Press the Control Key. The Formula Assistant panel becomes transparent and is shifted up. On the worksheet, select the desired cell. Press the Control Key or click the Expand button. This system returns the selected cell to the field. Hint: If necessary, use F4 to lock either the row and/or column value of the cell reference.

231 Query Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel. Field Description GEXQ: Returns a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of the query into the spreadsheet (see GEXQ Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the formula. Global Software, Inc.

232 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel. Field Description GEXD: Inserts query detail results onto the spreadsheet (see GEXD Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data. Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

233 Query Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel. Field Description GEXS: Opens a selector panel with the values returned from the query (see GEXS Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Global Software, Inc.

234 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel. Field Description GEXI: Opens the detail portion of the query and displays it in a drill down panel (see GEXI Formulas). Query Name Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Query Parameters 7. If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). The Results Box near the bottom left of the panel displays the formula as it is being built. Verify the data in the Results Box is correct, and then click one of the following toolbar icons or buttons. Insert (icon) or Insert (button) -- inserts the formula to the previously selected cell on the current worksheet and closes the panel. Copy (icon) -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel.

235 Query GEXQ Formula The GEXQ formula is used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A user may drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results. The drill down results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's SS Settings and how the drill down function is executed. Note: A SHELL Statement may be added to the query to launch an external program in replace of query detail as part of the drill down (see SQL SHELL Function). 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon menu select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXQ) on the Formulas fly out window. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXQ panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Total Field If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the field to be summarized. Note: Only fields assigned an alias appear in the drop down list. Total Type If the GEXQ summary field is to be defined within the formula, click the down arrow and select the summary type (i.e. SUM, COUNT, MIN, MAX). Global Software, Inc.

236 228 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Note: Values to be entered in the GEXQ formula will vary based upon whether the GEXQ summary field is defined in the query or the formula. Example 1 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Query: See Create the GEXQ Field for more information on creating the GEXQ summary field in the Query Designer. Example 2 - GEXQ Summary Field Defined in the Formula Assistant:

237 Query Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the summary portion of the query in the GEXQ formula is immediately executed. The true formula (GEXQ(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. 4. Copy the GEXQ formula to the appropriate destination cells. Note: If the GEXQ formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacent column, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXQ formula to the same number of rows generated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas). 5. To view detail records underlying an GEXQ summary value, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the GEXQ summary value or the data is pushed to a worksheet. Global Software, Inc.

238 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 GEXD Formula The GEXD formula is used to directly insert the detail results of a query into a spreadsheet. Note: See GEXD Limit to define the maximum the number of query output records in Excel. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon menu select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXD) on the Formulas fly out window. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXD panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the worksheet destination for the output. Defaults the current active worksheet. Starting Cell/Range/Table Specify the upper-left corner of the output target. This value may be a single cell, a range or a table. If Include Column Headings is selected, then it represents the left-most column heading as defined in the query. Otherwise it represents the left-most cell of the first row of data.

239 Query Field Description Fill Down Columns Specify the number of columns that contain formulas/values to the right of the results grid. These columns will fill down to match the number of records in the results. Valid values are 1, 2, 3, etc. Note: When using Fill Down Columns targeting a range the fill down formulas/values must reside outside of the output range. Note: When Include Column Heading is selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first row following the headings. When Include Column Headings is not selected, the fill down columns are required to be on the first two rows for the GEXD data. Note: In some instances, the GEXD Row function may be used in place of fill down columns (see GEXD Row Function). Clear a Range of Cells Specify the range of cells to be cleared prior to executing the formula. Note: When using Fill Down Columns, exclude the first row from the clear range to avoid deleting the fill down formula/value (i.e. if the Starting Cell is A7, the Clear Range of Cells should be "A8:xx"). Include Column Headings If selected, the generated output data will contain column headings from the query. Do not select the option if column headings will be manually entered in Excel. Auto Fit Column Sizes If selected, the system performs the Auto Fit Column Width feature of Excel when the formula is executed. Clear Sheet/Range/Table If selected, the entire output sheet (specified in the Worksheet field) or the range or table (specified in the Starting Cell/Range/Table field) is cleared when the GEXD formula is executed. Do not select this option if the GEXD formula or any of the query parameters are located on the output sheet. Note: See Clear a Range of Cells for clearing a range of cell data. Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.). Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and a label (GenQueryDetail...) appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXD(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. Global Software, Inc.

240 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To generate detail reports for all GEXD formulas in the workbook, from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>All Detail Reports (GEXD Formulas). The results for all GEXD formulas are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheets. To generate a detail report for a single GEXD formula, select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GEXD Formula) -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD). The results for the selected GEXD formula are expanded into the appropriate formatted sheet.

241 Query GEXD Targeting a Cell The following example demonstrates targeting a cell as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A7-G7 - represents the first row of output data. Cell H7 - identifies the fill down column formula (i.e. D7*.09). 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet7). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the starting cell for the output data (i.e. A7). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear a Range of Cells - indicates the area of output data to be cleared prior to executing the GEXD formula. As this example contain a fill down column (i.e. H7), the clear range starts on the second row of output data (i.e. A8: H500), allowing the fill down formula to remain for future executions of the GEXD. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

242 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

243 Query GEXD Targeting a Range The following example demonstrates targeting a range as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A7-G7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetRange. Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the range when the GEXD is generated. This column MUST be directly to the right of the range. 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet5). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the range for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetRange). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXD formula. Selected in this example. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

244 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

245 Query GEXD Targeting a Table The following example demonstrates targeting a table as the Starting Cell/Range/Table value. 1. Initial Excel setup for the example: Cell A1 - identifies the user-defined report name (i.e. OPEN INVOICES BY VENDOR). Cell A3 - user-assigned literal, indicating what the parameter value represents (i.e. Vendor #). Cell A4 - identifies the parameter value needed to execute the GEXD (i.e. 459). Cell B4 - user-assigned literal, indicating what type of formula will be used (i.e. GEXD Formula). Cell C4 - location where the GEXD formula will reside. Cells A6-H6 - represents report headers (manually entered in this example). Cells A6-H7 - a range was created in Excel for these cells and the range was named GEXDTargetTable. Cell H7 - contains a formula (i.e. D7*.09) which will automatically be filled down based upon the rows in the range when the GEXD is generated. This column is in the table. 2. Setup on the Formula Assistant - GEXD tab: Query Name - use the Open From File button to select the query (i.e. AP Open Invoices). Worksheet - use the drop down list to select the worksheet for the output (i.e. Sheet6). Starting Cell/Range/Table - indicates the name of the table for the output data (i.e. GEXDTargetTable). Fill Down Column - indicates the number of fill down columns at the end of the output data (i.e. 1). Include Column Headings - indicates whether or not the GEXD formula output data retrieves headings from the query. Not selected in this example as the headings have previously been keyed on the worksheet. Clear Sheet/Range/Table - indicates whether or not to clear the range of output data prior to executing the GEXD formula. Selected in this example. Parameters (Vendor #) - indicates the cell on the worksheet where the query parameter resides (i.e. A4). Global Software, Inc.

246 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 The completed worksheet after GEXD execution:

247 Query Execute SAP T-Code without a GEXD Formula Similar to the GEXD formula, the SAP T-Code function is used to return the detail results of a SAP T-Code and execution variant. The SAP T-Code function differs from a GEXD formula, as no actual formula resides on the spreadsheet and the results are displayed in a separate panel instead of on the spreadsheet. To Setup: 1. Ensure T-Codes are assigned to the appropriate SAP host configuration(s) in the Configurator. 2. On the Spreadsheet Server Settings - Ledger Specifics - SAP panel, select the T-Codes to be pinned to the ribbon. 3. Prior to using a new or modified pinned T-Code, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh>SAP T-Codes. The system refreshes pinned T-Codes. To Process: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon select Query, and then: To select a T-Code -- select SAP T-Codes. The SAP T-Codes - Select T-Code pane in Excel appears. Continue with step 2. To select a pinned T-Code -- navigate to and select the desired T-Code. The SAP T-Codes - Select Execution Variant pane in Excel appears. Continue with step Click the down arrow and select the host configuration to be used for listing SAP T-Codes. The list only displays SAP NetCo 3.0 connection type configurations. Global Software, Inc.

248 240 Spreadsheet Server - Version Select the desired T-Code by double clicking the T-Code in the list -or- selecting the T-Code in the list and clicking Next. The SAP T-Codes - Execution Variant pane appears listing execution variants available for the selected TCode. 4. Select the desired execution variant in the list and then: To process the T-Code using the default parameters -- click Execute. The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records. To view and/or modify the parameters to be used to process the T-Code -- click Next. The SAP T-Codes Parameters pane appears. Continue with step 5. Note: When the variant <None> is selected, the Execute button is disabled. Click Next and continue with step 5.

249 Query On the SAP T-Codes - Parameters pane, enter the appropriate parameters and click Execute. The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records (see screen shot above). Note: A value other than * must be entered for required parameters (indicated by red description). A Thru Value field appears when a parameter is set to allow a range selection. Currently leading zeros must be entered when k eying a value for the ACCOUNT parameter. Global Software, Inc.

250 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Execute Query without a GEXD Formula Similar to the GEXD formula, the Query function is used to return the detail results of a query. The Query function differs from a GEXD formula, as no actual formula resides on the spreadsheet and the results are displayed in a separate panel instead of on the spreadsheet. To Setup: 1. In Query Designer, create or open the desired query, from the Ribbon select Available on Ribbon, and then save the query. 2. Repeat step 1 for each desired query. To Process: 1. In Excel from the SS Ribbon, select Query. The system lists all queries flagged as Available on Ribbon. 2. Navigate to and select the desired query. If no parameters exist for the selected query, the Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records. If parameters exist for the selected query, the Query pane appears in Excel. Continue with step 3.

251 Query On the Query pane, enter the appropriate parameters and click Execute. The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records. Global Software, Inc.

252 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 GEXS Formula The GEXS formula opens a selector panel with the values returned from the specified query. Selected values from the first column are then returned to Excel. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside (typically adjacent to the Cell for Value), then from the SS Ribbon select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXS) on the Formulas fly out window. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXS panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Selector Text Specify the label for the GEXS. Cell for Value Specify the cell destination for the selected query value(s). Query Parameters If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

253 Query Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the specified Selector Text appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXS(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. 4. To execute the GEXS formula, select the cell containing the GEXS formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Select Item panel appears. 5. Data in the list may be filtered, re-sorted and/or rearranged as necessary. To filter data -- enter a value in the appropriate column filter. Alphanumeric fields filter character by character. Numeric fields filter upon entry of the full field value. To re-sort data -- click the column heading to re-sort a column in ascending order. Click the column heading a second time to re-sort the column in descending order. To move a column -- click and hold on the desired column header, then drag and drop the column right or left to the desired position. Note: Column order is important, as only the first column of selected data will be inserted in the formula. Global Software, Inc.

254 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 On the Select Item panel, specify the appropriate Parameter Type and then select the desired value(s) and click the Insert Selected Value(s) button. The selected value(s) are returned to the Cell for Value cell on the spreadsheet. To select a single value -- double click the value -or- select the value and click Insert Selected Value(s). To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected. To select multiple values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and then select the last value in the range. Example 1: Multiple values for a field to be used by a Smart Parm are selected, and the Insert Selected Value(s) button is selected.

255 Query GEXI Formula The GEXI formula is used to display the detail results of a query. The results can appear in a single panel, tabbed panel or worksheet based upon options in the user's SS Settings and how the drill down function is executed. 1. In Excel, select the cell where the formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. Select the formula (GEXI) on the Formulas fly out window. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Formula Assistant - GEXI panel. Field Query Name Description Click the Open From File button ( to be executed. ) to navigate to and select the query Click the Search Online button ( ) to select and download the query to be executed (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Query Parameters Global Software, Inc. If applicable, specify the cells containing the query parameters. This area assumes that the parameters will be on a row next to each other, so entering a value and clicking the down arrow will populate the rest of the fields (i.e. first parameter cell reference is A13, then clicking the down arrow for the parameter populates the following fields with B13, C13, etc.).

256 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Click Insert. The formula is inserted into the cell and the GEXI indicator (i.e.???) appears in the cell. The true formula (GEXI(...)) can be seen in the Excel formula bar. Note: The GEXI indicator value used is determined by an application setting in the Configurator. 4. Copy the GEXI formula to the appropriate destination cells. Note: If the GEXI formula is used in conjunction with data generated via an GEXD formula and is in an adjacent column, use the GEXD Fill Down Column feature to copy the GEXI formula to the same number of rows generated by the GEXD formula (see GEXD formulas). 5. To view detail records for the specified query, select the cell containing the GEXI formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The Drill Down panel appears displaying the detail records for the query or the data is pushed to a worksheet.

257 Query Global Software, Inc. 249

258 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Execute Lookup The Look function opens a selector panel with values returned from a specified query. Selected values from the first column are then returned to the active cell in Excel -or- in a Parameters List. The Lookup function in Excel differs from a GEXS formula, as no formula resides on the spreadsheet. Queries (EDQs) available for processing from the Lookup function must reside in a specific location. To Setup: 1. Ensure a folder labeled, Explore, exists in the root of the user's EDQ location. 2. In Query Designer, create the desired queries and save them in the Explore folder. To Process: 1. In Excel select the desired cell and from the SS Ribbon select Lookup -or- from either the SS Settings Writeback Template or Select Oracle Public API panels, or from the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, select the desired cell in the Parameters List and click Lookup. The system lists the available queries located in the Explore folder. Note: Only the first fifteen (15) queries located in the root of the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) sub-folders located in the Explore folder are listed. Only the first ten (10) queries located in a sub-folder are listed. No second level sub-folders are listed. 2. Navigate to and select the desired query. The Select Item panel appears. 3. If necessary, reorder the columns, as the system returns value(s) from the first column. 4. On the Select Item panel, select the desired value(s) and click Insert Selected Value(s). The selected values from the first column are returned to the active cell on the spreadsheet -or- in the parameters list.

259 Query Download Queries from Query Exchange Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online query depository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. Query Exchange may be accessed from within either Query Designer or Excel. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by a user setting in the Configurator. Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component. To Download a Query from Query Exchange: 1. From within Query Designer: In Query Designer from the Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens. From within Excel: In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab. Click the Search Online button ( 2. ). Query Exchange opens. Select and/or key the appropriate search criteria and click Search -or- click Advanced Search, enter the appropriate search criteria and click the Advanced Search button. The system lists all queries matching the search criteria. Global Software, Inc.

260 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To download: A single query -- click the Install Query icon ( ) next to the desired query. The Save As panel appears. Note: The Select a Connection panel appears prior to the Save As panel if the connection associated with the selected query does not exist in the Configurator, allowing the user to select a connection to be assigned to the query. Multiple queries -- select the appropriate check box(es) and click Download Selected Items. The Browse for Folder panel appears. 4. On the Save As or Browse for Folder panels, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change the file name, then click Save or OK. The Query Retrieved panel appears confirming that the query(ies) has been saved to Query Designer. 5. On the Query Retrieved panel, click OK. Query Exchange reappears, allowing the user to select another query for downloading. 6. Repeat steps 2-5 as necessary to download additional queries. 7. When all queries have been downloaded, click the X to close Query Exchange. If Query Exchange was accessed from Query Designer, then Query Designer reappears and opens the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon. If Query Exchange was accessed from Build a Template or Formula Assistant panels in Excel, then the original panel reappears and defaults the name of the last query downloaded via the Install Query icon in the Query Name field. Note: Refer to GEXD Formulas, GEXQ Formulas, GEXI Formulas, and GEXS Formulas for the steps required to complete a formula.

261 Query Designer 9 Query Designer 9.1 Query Designer Architecture 253 The Query Designer is a visual tool which allows the user to design, maintain, and run queries. The following chapter gives an overview of the various parts of the Query Designer, and describes the basic navigation. 1. From the desktop, select Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Query Designer. The Query Designer panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

262 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 QD Ribbon The Query Designer's many functions are accessed via a ribbon. Menu Item Description Globe Button: Menu used to create, open, close and save queries. New Closes any open query and begins the process to create a new query (see Create a New Query). Open Query Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere on the network. Close Query Closes the active query. Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears (see Save the Query for the First Time). Save As Saves the active query to a different target location and/or file name. Exit Exits the Query Designer application. Recent Documents Lists recent queries previously opened in the Query Designer. Click on a query in the list to reopen the query. Quick Access Toolbar: Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate a query anywhere on the network. Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears. Closes the active query.

263 Query Designer Menu Item Description Home Tab: Main menu used to maintain and execute queries. 255 Add Table Allows the user to add an available table from the current connection. Add Parameter Allows the user to define a parameter to be utilized as field criteria (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). Change Connection Allows the user to change the connection for the selected query. Definition Copies the open query definition to Notepad. This is useful for documenting queries (see Textual Query Definition). Lib= Defines the library of the active query. GEXD Limit Specifies the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula is generated. Available on Ribbon If selected, indicates the query is listed under the Query option on the SS Ribbon in Excel and is available for processing (see Execute Query without a GEXD Formula). Un-Locked / Locked Locks or unlocks, based upon the current query status, the query to prevent modification of the query. Save Query Saves the active query. The first time a new query is saved the Save As dialog box appears. Close Query Closes the active query. All Records Executes the active query and returns all records. Note: Press F5 as a shortcut to execute all records for the query. 1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records. Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record. Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records. Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query. Abort Aborts the currently active executing query. Explorer File System Displays queries located in the EDQ file repository directory location as defined in QD Settings. Query View Returns the top left panel to the open query's table view. Send to Query Exchange Sends the open query to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange. The user is prompted to key a query description if one is not currently assigned. Global reviews all queries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange (see Download or Send Query Exchange Queries). Search Online Goes to Global's online query depository, Query Exchange, allowing the user to download queries to Query Designer (see Download Queries from Query Exchange). Connection Tab: Menu used to manage active connections. View Opens the Connections panel, allowing the user to view and test connections to which the user is authorized (see Connections). Disconnect All Open Connections Disconnects all open connections. Update Query Connections Opens the Update Query Connections panel, allowing the user to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection. Global Software, Inc.

264 256 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Menu Item Description File System Tab: Menu used to manage queries located in the EDQ file repository. Note: This menu is only available when the Explorer File System option is selected on the Home menu. Clone Copies the selected query. Delete Deletes the selected query. Upgrade EDQs for File System Converts EDQ files from the Query Catalog to the Explorer File System. View Tab: Menu used to modify QD settings, and to access Ad Hoc Queries and other reporting functions. SQL Font Defines the font used in the SQL Text panel. Font Size Defines the font size used in SQL Text panel. Decrease Spacing Decreases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel. Increase Spacing Increases the spacing in the tables on the Query View panel. Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Opens the Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel, allowing the user to view preexisting ad hocs. View Log File Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see QD View Log). Settings Opens the Query Designer Settings panel, allowing the user to defined various criteria to control processing (see QD Settings). Field Options Tab: Menu used to access/process various functions associated with selected query fields (see Field List Menu). Note: This menu is only available when a query is open. Totals (Group By) Toggles to display or hide the Totals column which is used for totaling and grouping (see Create a Totals (Group By) Query). Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thus removing duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique. GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQ Field). Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Field Descriptions as Aliases Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions from the table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Smart Parm for This Field Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see Smart Parms in the Query Designer). Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables and parameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is to drag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location. Preview Data Opens the ResultsContainer displaying data for the selected field(s). Delete Field(s) Deletes the selected field(s) from the query.

265 Query Designer Menu Item Description 1,000 Records Executes the active query and returns the first 1000 records. Single Record Executes the active query and returns the first record. Prompted Executes the active query and returns a prompted number or records. Execute GEDQ Executes the select statement only portion of the query. Abort Aborts the currently active executing query. Global Software, Inc. 257

266 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Explorer File System Panel The Explorer File System panel is a view of the default folder and subdirectories for EDQ files, and the query (EDQ) files located within the directories. An option in the SS Settings defines the default folder and an option in the QD Settings limits the fields displayed on the panel. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Explorer File System. The Explorer File System panel appears. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Explorer File System panel. 3. Field Description Explorer File System View Directory Tree Displays the default folder and subdirectories for query (EDQ) files, as defined in the SS Settings. Name File name for the query (EDQ). Description User defined query description. Connection Connection used by the query. SmartPak SmartPak grouping value for the query. Size File size of the query. Modified Date and time the query was last modified. Modified By User ID of the last user who modified the query. Use the table to reference available functions on the Explorer File System panel. Function Description Open Query To open a query, double click the query name. The Query View Panel appears. Re-size / Hide Columns To re-size or hide a column, click and hold the left or right edge of the column header and drag to the desired width. Re-sort Columns To re-sort a column in ascending order, click the column heading. To resort in descending order, click the column heading a second time.

267 Query Designer Query Menu The Query menu is accessed from the Explorer File System panel, and allows the user to maintain, clone, or delete a query. 1. On the Explorer File System panel, right click on the desired query. The Query popup menu appears. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Query popup menu. Menu Item Description Change Description Opens the Description panel, allowing the user to change the query description. Clone Query Opens the Clone Query panel, allowing the user to enter the name to be assigned to the cloned query. Remove Query Opens the Delete File panel, allowing the user to confirm the deletion of the query. Assign SmartPak Opens the SmartPak panel, allowing the user to maintain the SmartPak grouping value(s) associated with the query. Explore Opens Windows Explorer, allowing the user to browse to and open a query which resides outside the default query location. Global Software, Inc.

268 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Query View Panel The Query View panel is used to visually layout a query. Tables and relationships for the query are displayed in this panel. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Query View panel appears for the selected query. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed from the QD Ribbon, by selecting Home>Query View. Note: An ellipse appears at the end of the table name indicating the name and description is too long to display. Hover the cursor over the table name to show a tool tip displaying the full table name and description. 2. Use the table for available functions on the Query View panel. Function Description Add a Table Right click in any open gray space away from a relationship line, the Tables panel appears allowing the user to select additional tables. Move a Table Drag the table header to another spot on the screen. Re-size a Table Left click and drag on the blue box at the bottom right of the table. Create a Relationship Click on a field from one table, then drag and drop it on the appropriate field in another table. Modify a Relationship Double click on a relationship line -or- select a relationship line and right click (see Create Relationships). Select a Field(s) Double click the desired field -or- drag and drop it to add it to the selected fields on the Field List panel. In addition, one or more fields may be selected, and then right click and select Add Field(s) to add the selected field(s) to the list (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table).

269 Query Designer Table Menu The Table menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functions associated with the selected table. 1. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table popup menu appears. The options available on the Table menu vary based upon the query connection type. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table popup menu. Menu Item Description Change Database/Library For iseries and SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Select Library panel, allowing the user to select a different database/library from which to retrieve the table data. The newly selected database/library name appears in the table header section. See Use Parameter to Supply Database/Library Name for how to use a parameter for assigning the database/library to be used when executing the query. Change Schema For Oracle connection queries only, opens the Change Schema panel allowing the user to specify a different schema for the table. Change Table Owner For SQL Server connection queries only, opens the Change Table Owner panel allowing the user to specify a different owner for the table. Refresh Field Names from Database Updates the fields listed for the table. Set Table Alias For all connection queries except SAP, opens the Table Alias panel allowing the user to enter an alias name for the table. Remove Table Removes the table and any associated relationships and selected fields from the query. Global Software, Inc.

270 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Table Field Menu The Table Field menu is accessed from the Query View panel, and allows the user to access/process various functions associated with field(s) in the selected table. 1. On the Query View panel, selected the desired field(s) from the table and right click. The Table Menu popup menu appears. The options available on the Table Field menu vary based upon the field type selected. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Table Field popup menu. Menu Item Description Add Field(s) Adds the selected field(s) to the bottom of the Field List for the query. Preview Data For non-image type fields only, opens the ResultsContainer displaying data for the selected field(s).

271 Query Designer Field List Panel The Field List panel displays the fields included in the query and the field attributes that will be utilized to retrieve the data. In addition, the panel displays information as to how the data will be grouped, sorted, displayed and selected. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Field List panel appears for the selected query. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Field List panel. Field Column Description Type Type of field. Valid types are T (text), N (numeric), D (date), B (Boolean), U (unknown), I (image), and G (graphic, applies to iseries connection types only). Field Name Field name from the source table. In addition, an alias name may be assigned to the field. The alias name appears in front of the actual field name. Example: Field name is CNME and the alias name is Customer Name. Totals Indicates how the field is being grouped (totaled). This column only appears when the Totals (Group By) function is being used (see Create a Totals (Group By) Query). Table Name Source table from which the field is being retrieved. The value "(none)" appears for a calculated field. Sort Type Indicates whether or not to use the field for sorting, and how to sort the field. Valid values are (none), Ascending, and Descending. Sort Order Indicates the order by which the query data will be sorted. The field with the lowest number is the first sort key. Visible Indicates whether or not the field will be visible in the query output. By default all fields are visible. De-selecting the option for a selected field will allow the field to be used as selection criteria, but not included in the query output. Criteria 1-6 Selection criteria (i.e. specific values, parameters, expressions) to be used when retrieving query data. Criteria entered vertically in the same column are combined with a logical AND. Criteria entered horizontally across columns are combined with a logical OR. Click the ellipse button ( ) for the appropriate field to access the Builder for entering criteria expressions (see Builder Panel). Global Software, Inc.

272 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field List Menu The Field List Menu is accessed from the Field List panel, and allows the user to access/process various functions associated with selected query fields. The same functions are available from the Field Options tab on the Ribbon. 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field. The Field List popup menu appears. Note: If no fields are in the list and right click in the Field List, only the Add Calculated Field option is available. 2. Use the table to identify menu functions on the Field List popup menu. Menu Item Description Totals (Group By) Toggles to display or hide the Totals column which is used for totaling and grouping (see Create a Totals (Group By) Query). Unique Rows When enabled changes the query to a SELECT DISTINCT query, thus removing duplicate rows from the result set causing each row to be unique. GEXQ (Summary) Field Creates summary SQL code for the selected field (see Create the GEXQ Field). Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) Allows the user to manually assign an alias name to the selected field (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Field Descriptions as Aliases Creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions from the table schema (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Add Smart Parm for This Field Creates a smart parameter and assigns it to the selected field (see Smart Parms in the Query Designer). Add Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel that avails the user to the query source tables and parameters, and provides tools to aid in creating a calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Edit Calculated Field Opens the Builder panel for a selected calculated field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Move Field Up/Down Moves the selected field up or down one line. An alternative to this is to drag the selected field with the mouse and drop it in the desired location. Preview Data Opens the ResultsContainer displaying data for the selected field(s). Delete Field(s) Deletes the selected field(s) from the query.

273 Query Designer Builder Panel The Builder is used to enter query criteria or create calculated fields. The Builder panel may be accessed from the Field List panel by: Selecting the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields. Selecting a field, right clicking and selecting Add Calculated Field -or- Edit Calculated Field (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). Builder Operation Buttons Operation buttons are provided on the Builder panel to assist the user in building expressions. Global Software, Inc.

274 266 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Builder Functional Buttons Additional functional buttons are available on the Builder panel. Button Function iseries, Oracle, SQL Server Tabs: Each tab has specific features to support the appropriate server. Not all features are available on each tab. Current Date Inserts the expression for the current date into the query. CASE Builder Opens the Case Builder panel, allowing the user to create a case statement and push it into the Builder panel (see Use the CASE Builder). 90 Days Ago Inserts the (CURRENT DATE - 90 DAYS) expression. The "- 90" may then be changed to a different value. TRIM (<expr>) Trims leading and trailing blanks. In ('x','x') Inserts an IN expression (valid if field criteria is in a comma-delimited list). Date Conversion Click the down arrow and select the original format of the date field to be converted. The system then inserts the selected date field into an expression that converts the field into an actual Date Type field. YYDDD - Julian date format used by Infinium CYYDDD - Julian date format used by JD Edwards YYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack Henry YYYYMMDD - date format used by BPCS Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above. Salesforce Tab: Refer to Salesforce documentation for more information regarding date functions and date literals. Today Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for 24 hours. Last_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the last 90 days. Last_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the last n days. The "30" may then be changed to a different value. Last_N_Weeks:2 Inserts the date literal, which for the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the last day of the previous week and continues for the last n weeks. The "2" may then be changed to a different value. Next_90_Days Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the next 90 days. Next_N_Days:30 Inserts the date literal, for which the number n provided, starts 12:00:00 of the current day and continues for the next n days. The "30" may then be changed to a different value. This_Year Inserts the date literal, which starts 12:00:00 on January 1 of the current year and continues through the end of December 31 of the current year. Calendar_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar month for the selected date field. Calendar_Quarter Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar quarter for the selected date field. Calendar_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the calendar year for the selected date field.

275 Query Designer Button 267 Function Day_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day in the month for the selected date field. Day_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the day in the year for the selected date field. Week_In_Month Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week in the month for the selected date field. Week_In_Year Inserts the date function, which returns a number representing the week in the year for the selected date field. Misc Tab: %GEXDROW% Inserts the keyword %GEXDROW%, which replaces the ROW number of the Excel row when used as detail results in a GEXD formula (see GEXD Row). %USER% Inserts the keyword %USER%, which replaces the username in the connection to the data. %WINDOWSUSER% Inserts the keyword %WINDOWSUSER%, which replaces the Windows user ID when executing the query. %APPUSER% Inserts the keyword %APPUSER%, which replaces the application user from the Configurator for the user when executing the query. COALESCE Converts null values to the value specified in the function (the default is 0). Logic Click the down arrow to access additional %IF and %LOOP functions. Simple Loop Inserts loop statement, allowing the query to loop through fields and summarize them based on user defined parameters for the loop counter. The loop will continue to process from the first counter until it hits the second counter. Loop Count Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT%. Loop Count NN Inserts the keyword %LOOPCOUNT2%. The "2" may then be changed to a different number to indicate the number of characters/digits to display for the value. Simple IF Inserts a basic IF-THEN-ELSE statement which may then be modified. Custom Buttons Test SQL Performs user defined function. Verifies the SQL statement for the calculated field. Increases or decreases the font size in the work area on the panel. Get Values Retrieves each distinct value of a selected field. Comments Reference the following for entering comments on the Builder panel. Comments must be on a separate line. Connection Type Comment Syntax Access and SAP Comments are not supported. DSN DSN owner should k now whether or not comments are supported. iseries and Oracle /*this is a comment*/ SQL Server Two dashes then the comment text (i.e. --this is a comment) Global Software, Inc.

276 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Custom Buttons The Builder panel contains two custom buttons. The user defines the function to occur when each button is selected. To Maintain Custom Buttons: 1. On the Builder panel Misc tab, click the Edit Custom Buttons button ( 2. Use the table to enter data on the Customize Builder panel. 3. ). The Customize Builder panel appears. Field Description Button to Customize Click the down arrow and select which custom button to modify. Display Text Specify the label to appear on the custom button. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to appear for the custom button. Preview Displays how the custom button will appear. Assigned Function Specify the function to occur or the expression to be inserted into the Builder when the custom button is selected. Button Function Clear Button Assignment Clears the text, tool tip and assigned function values previously assigned to the custom button. Click OK. The system updates the custom button on the Builder panel.

277 Query Designer Parameters Panel The Parameters panel is used to maintain parameters for the query. Test values may be assigned to the parameters, enabling the user to test a query directly in the Query Designer prior to using it in Excel. Criteria assigned to parameters also controls drill down sub query processing and the listing of valid values in Build a Template. 1. In Query Designer, when a query is opened, the Parameters panel appears for the selected query. 2. Use the table to reference the contents on the Parameters panel. 3. Field Description ID System assigned parameter ID number. Description Parameter description, generally the field name. Test Value Default test parameter value. Sub Query Column Column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column names when determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associated drill down. Assign Query Query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel. Use the table to reference available functions on the Parameters panel. Function Description Add a Parameter To add a new parameter, click the Add button ( ). The Add a Parameter popup panel appears (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). Edit a Parameter To modify a parameter, click in the desired field and a blinking cursor appears allowing changes. Save Changes To save parameter changes, click the Save Query button on the QD Ribbon. Delete a Parameter To delete a parameter(s), select the parameter(s) and then click the Delete button ( ) -or- right click and select Delete. Switch Parameter Order To switch the order of two parameters, select the first parameter, right click and select Switch Parameter Order, then select the second parameter and click OK. (see Note) Renumber All Parameters (see Note) Global Software, Inc. To fill in any gaps in parameter ID numbers, right click and select Renumber All Parameters.

278 270 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Note: Changing the parameter order will break any existing worksheets using the query.

279 Query Designer SQL Text Panel The SQL Text panel displays the SQL text to be executed for both a detail query and a GEXQ (summary query). Auto Generate Mode By selecting the Auto Generate check box (the default) the application continually updates the text to reflect changes made in the visual layout. Manual Mode If desired, SQL text may be manually entered or the auto-generated SQL text may be manually modified. For example, manual entry is required for establishing a SHELL to process an external program (see SQL SHELL Function). 1. De-select the Auto Generate check box. A popup panel appears. 2. On the popup panel, specify whether or not to copy the auto-generated SQL text. The Auto Generate label is set to red, indicating in manual mode. Yes -- leaves any previously auto-generated SQL text in the SQL text box. No -- clears all data from the SQL text box. 3. Toggling back and forth from auto-generate to manual mode, the system saves the changes for the life of the query. When the query is saved the text that is currently displayed in the SQL text box will be the executed SQL statement. Global Software, Inc.

280 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 QuickText Panel The QuickText panel allows the user to specify, if desired, GEXD or GEXQ QuickText verbiage (button label) and associated tool tips for a query. The queries to which a GEXD or GEXQ QuickText value is assigned will automatically appear in a list under the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query sub menu in Excel as a short cut for easier and quicker processing. Use the table to enter data on the QuickText panel. Field Description GEXD QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query sub menu to identify the query for building a GEXD formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item. GEXQ QuickText Specify the button label to appear on the SS Ribbon Build a Template>Query sub menu to identify the query for building a GEXQ formula. Tool Tip Specify the tool tip to display for the associated QuickText item.

281 Query Designer SAP Panel The SAP panel only appears for queries using a SAP connection type and allows the user to specify, if desired, the name of a secondary database connection to be used for processing the query. Use the table to enter data on the SAP panel. Field Description Secondary Database Connection For SAP designer GLs only, if desired specify the name of the secondary database connection to be used for processing the query. Include SAP "AS" Alias If selected, the SQL statement is built such that aliases are identified as "AS alias name". This option must be selected in order to sort a grouped query. When this option is selected, special character restrictions are enforced for SAP alias names. Global Software, Inc.

282 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 QD Settings Query Designer (QD) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. The majority of the options define processing for all users on the PC; however, the option Show EDQ Detail is defined for each individual user. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select View>Settings. The Query Designer Settings - General panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description Show EDQ Detail If selected, all query related fields are displayed on the Explorer File System panel. If not selected, only query name, size and modified date/ time are displayed thus reducing retrieval time. Auto-Alias Fields If selected, the field description is automatically assigned as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, then the field name is assigned as the alias (see Assign Aliases to Fields). Note: This function does not apply to calculated fields. Results Grid Render Right to Left If selected, text on the ResultsContainer panel is right justified. Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see QD View Log). Limit Preview Data to nnn Records If selected, the number of values/records retrieved, when the Preview Data option from the Table or Field List grid is processed, is limited by the number of records specified.

283 Query Designer Button Function View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see QD View Log). The File Locations panel displays the location of various files utilized in Query Designer. These file locations are defined in user's SS Settings. Global Software, Inc.

284 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 The System Information panel displays various data related to the user's system and Query Designer. To this information to the helpdesk, click the button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the contents of this panel in the body of the . Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button.

285 Query Designer The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online user manual. 6. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

286 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Connections A database connection must be created in order to process Query Designer queries (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formulas or sub queries). All connections are created and maintained in the Configurator. In Query Designer connections may be viewed and/or tested. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Connection>View. The Connections panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Connections panel. 3. Field Description Available Connections Displays a list of connections available for use in Query Designer to which the user is authorized. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load local connections. Host If applicable, displays the server name or IP address. Database If applicable, displays the database -or- for Oracle databases displays the SID and Port values. User Name Displays the user name to be used to test the database connection. The value may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input. Password Displays the password to be used to test the database connection. The value may be keyed when the connection is set to Prompt for Input Button Function Test Displays a message in the Results field indicating whether or not the connection was successful. To test a connection, select the connection from the list and click the Test button. A message appears in the Results field indicating whether or not the connection was successful.

287 Query Designer Update Query Connections The Update Query Connections function is used to mass change the original connection assigned to queries to a new connection. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Connection>Update Query Connections. The Update Query Connections panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Update Query Connections panel. 3. Field Description Original Connection From the list of connections, select the connection to be updated. The system displays the selected connection in the All Queries Using Connection section on the panel. Available Connections From the list of connections available for use in Query Designer, select the connection to be assigned to the queries associated with the original connection. The system displays the selected connection in the Will Now Use Connection section on the panel. Note: The list excludes SQL Server connections flagged as load local connections. Click OK. The system updates the appropriate queries, replacing the original connection with the new connection. Global Software, Inc.

288 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Create a New Query Use the following steps to create a new query. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select the Globe button>new. The Query Name and Connection panel appears. 2. On the Query Name and Connection panel, specify a unique name and description (optional) for the query, and select which connection to use, then click OK. Based upon the setup of the connection either a Login panel or the Tables panel appears. 3. If necessary, on the Login panel enter the appropriate data (i.e. user ID and password), and click Login. The Tables panel appears. Note: The first time the Tables panel is accessed for a connection, the system builds a cache of available tables. Time required may to load the tables may vary based upon the number of tables. Subsequent times the Tables panel is accessed for the connection process faster because tables are loaded from cache. 4. Proceed to the next step, Add Tables.

289 Query Designer Save the Query for the First Time It is recommended to save frequently during query creation/editing. The initial save of a query functions differently than when an existing query is saved. 1. In Designer Query from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. The Save As panel appears positioned to the default folder for EDQ files and the File Name is highlighted. Nav Tip: This function may also be processed by selecting the Globe button menu or Quick Access Toolbar equivalent (see QD Ribbon). 2. On the Save As panel, if necessary navigate to a different folder location and/or change the file name for the query. 3. Click the Save button. The system saves the query file (.EDQ), and a confirmation panel appears. 4. Click OK. Global Software, Inc.

290 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Add Tables New Query When creating a new query, the first task is to select the tables (files) required for the query. After logging into a database, the Tables panel appears listing tables from the database assigned to the applicable connection or specified on the previous Login panel. A user's ability to select a table, view and/or synonym for a specific standard connection is determined by the Query Designer Object Security option in User settings in the Configurator. Note: The first time the Tables panel is accessed for a connection, the system builds a cache of available tables. Time required may to load the tables may vary based upon the number of tables. Subsequent times the Tables panel is accessed for the connection process faster because tables are loaded from cache. Refresh the table list to rebuild the cache. Existing Query To add a table to an existing query, in Query Designer from the QD Ribbon select Home>Add Table. To Add Table(s) to a Query: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Tables panel. Field Description Library For iseries or SQL Server connections, click the down arrow and select the library from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. The value &Lib defaults indicating to use the database library specified on the Login panel. Data Type For Oracle connections only, click the down arrow and select the type from which to retrieve tables for the list and query execution. Valid types are Synonyms, Tables, and Views. Search For Specify a name or description in order to search for the desired table. Each character typed filters the list.

291 Query Designer To add tables to the Favorites list, from the All tab on the Tables panel, select the desired table(s) and click Add to Favorites. The selected tables are added to the Favorites tab. If desired, click on the Favorites tab and assign an alias name and/or modify the description for selected tables to aid in identifying tables on the Favorites tab. Note: If tables have added to the favorites list, then any subsequent time the Tables panel is displayed for the associated connection, the Favorites tab defaults. 3. To select table(s) for a query, from the Tables panel, select the table(s) and click the Add button. The table(s) are added and the Query View panel appears. To select a single table -- double click the table -or- select the table and click the Add button. To select multiple tables -- press and hold the Ctrl key as tables are selected. To select multiple tables in a range -- select the first table in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last table in the range. 4. To add another table to the query, from the QD Ribbon select Home>Add Table -or- right click in any open gray space on the Query View panel. The Tables panel appears. Repeat step 3 until all tables have been selected. 5. If the database environment has been changed (i.e. install a new version or maintenance fix of the ERP software that includes table additions or restructures), click the Refresh List from Database button ( ) to refresh the view of tables. The system re-reads the database schema, refreshes the tables listed and their structures. 6. If more than one table was selected for the query, then proceed to the next step, Create Relationships. If only one table was selected, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields. Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features. Global Software, Inc.

292 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Create Relationships If more than one table is selected in query, it is necessary to create a relationship or join between the tables. To Create a Relationship Between Two Tables: 1. On the Query View panel, drag and drop a field from one table to the corresponding field in another table. The system will draw a line indicating which fields are joined. Below the left mouse was dragged from the F0411.RPAN8 field and dropped on the F0101.ABAN8 field. 2. If necessary, repeat step 1 to create additional joins which may be needed to create the appropriate one-to-one or one-to-many relationship between tables. 3. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields. To Modify Relationship Properties: 1. On the Query View panel, double click the line connecting the two tables -or- select the relationship line and right click. The Relationship Properties panel appears.

293 Query Designer Use the table to enter data on the Relationship Properties panel. Field Description Left Table In special cases, use the Left Table section to modify the field in the left table to adhere to SQL rules. Example 1: To join a text field to a numeric field a SQL command must be entered to convert the numeric field to a text field (i.e CHAR(<field>)). Note: An ellipse appears at the end of the table name indicating the name is too long to display. Hover the cursor over the table name to show a tool tip displaying the full table name. Right Table In special cases, use the Right Table section to modify the field in the right table to adhere to SQL rules. See Example 1 above for the Left Table section. Joined Fields Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join relationship is selected, which includes only rows where the joined fields from both tables are the same. Additional options are available to join all records from the left table and only records in the right table where the joined fields match, or to join all records from the right table and only records in the left table where the joined fields match. Trim Both Fields If selected, the system trims (removes leading blanks) for both of the joined fields. 3. To delete the selected join relationship, click the Delete Relationship button -or- to delete all relationships in the query, click the Delete All Relationships button. 4. Once all changes are made, click OK. 5. Once the relationship is properly defined, proceed to the step Select or Create Query Fields. Global Software, Inc.

294 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Select or Create Query Fields Fields should be added to a query in the following general order: 1. Add fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables (see Fields Used Direct from Source Table). 2. Add table field descriptions as aliases (see Assign Aliases to Fields). 3. Add calculated fields (see Create/Edit Calculated Fields). 4. Rename any fields as desired (see Assign Aliases to Fields).

295 Query Designer Fields Used Direct from Source Table Use the following steps to add fields to the query that are to be used directly (as-is) from selected source tables. 1. To add a field(s) to a query, on the Query View select the desired field(s) from a table: To add a single field -- double click the field -or- right click and select Add Field(s). The field is added to the bottom of the Field List panel. To add a single field and assign the location in the list -- drag and drop the field to the desired location in the list. If the arrow is blue ( ) for the associated position, the field is inserted before; if the arrow is yellow ( ) the field is insert below. To add select multiple fields -- press and hold the Ctrl key as fields are selected from a table, then right click and select Add Field(s). The fields are added to the bottom of the list. To add multiple field in a range -- select the first field in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last field in the range, then right click and select Add Field(s). The fields are added to the bottom of the list. In the example below fields RPAN8 and ABALPH were selected. 2. Repeat step 1 until all of the fields that are to be used "as-is" have been selected. 3. To search for a field, enter the field name or description in the Search field. Each character typed filters the search. For example, to find the Vendor Invoice Number field enter the word "invoice" in the search field. All fields containing the word "invoice" are filtered in the table. Clear the Search field to remove the filter. Global Software, Inc.

296 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Add Image Field Type The Query Designer component allows for displaying images and PDFs for Access, Oracle and SQL Server connection types. The images and/or PDFs must be stored in the database using the appropriate field type definition as noted below: Access connection - OLE Object Oracle connection - Binary Large Object (BLOB) SQL Server connection - Image General rules for executing a query containing an image field are: When querying images, only the image field may be visible. If more than one record is returned, only the image for the first record is displayed. To Add an Image Type Field to a Query: 1. On the Query View panel, double click the desired field from a table -or- drag and drop the field to the Field List panel. The Select Image Type panel appears. 2. Click the down arrow for the File Type field and select the image type to be assigned to the field (i.e. Image or PDF), and then click OK. The system adds the field to the Field List panel and assigns the selected image type as the field alias. In the example below the image field PHOTO was selected, and the alias IMAGE was assigned.

297 Query Designer Preview Data Query Designer allows for previewing data available for selected fields. This feature may be helpful to determine the proper field(s) or selection criteria to be used in the query. The Limit Get Values to nnn Records option in QD Settings determines the maximum number of records retrieved. To Preview Data for Selected Field(s) Not Yet Added to the Query: 1. On the Query View panel, selected the desired field(s) from the table, right click and select Preview Data. The Results Container panel appears displaying data for the selected field(s). Note: This feature does not function for image type fields. To Preview Data for Selected Field(s) Already Added to the Query: 1. On the Field List panel, selected the desired field(s), right click and select Preview Data. The Results Container panel appears displaying data for the selected field(s). Note: This feature does not function for calculated or image type fields, nor when fields from multiple tables are selected. Global Software, Inc.

298 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Assign Aliases to Fields As field names from tables may be nondescript and confusing, assigning an alias name to a field assists in clarifying what the field is. There are three ways to assign aliases to fields. When assigning aliases to fields, it is important as to when each method may be used to assign aliases to fields. Auto-Alias Fields -- If the Auto-Alias Fields option is selected in QD Settings, then the system automatically assigns the field description as the alias when a field is added to a query. If a field description does not exist, then the field name is assigned as the alias. This function does not apply to calculated fields. Add Field Descriptions as Aliases -- The system creates aliases for each field in the query using the field descriptions from the table schema. Generally this option is used immediately after all fields that are to be used directly (as-is) from the source tables have been added to the query. Once a calculated field has been added, this method for assigning aliases is no longer available. Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) -- Allows the user to manually assign or modify an alias field name to a selected field. Generally this option is used after any calculated fields have been added. Note: For SAP connection only, aliases may not contain special characters. The system automatically assigns the appropriate alias for image type fields (see Add Image Field Type). To Add Field Descriptions as Aliases: 1. On the Field List panel, right click on a field and select Add Field Descriptions as Aliases. The system uses the field descriptions from the table schema to assign aliases to each field in the query. Note: This function is not available after a calculated field has been added to the query. To Manually Assign or Modify a Single Alias -- Alias (... AS nnnnnn ): 1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select Aliases (...AS nnnnnn). The Modify Alias panel appears. 2. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias value and click OK. The system assigns the alias field name to the selected field.

299 Query Designer Example: BEFORE aliases have been assigned (and before calculated fields have been added). AFTER Add Field Descriptions as Aliases has been processed. AFTER Alias (... AS nnnnnn ) has been processed for RPAN8, ABALPH and RPDOC. Note: When using an Access connection aliases are delimited by brack ets instead of double quotes. Global Software, Inc. 291

300 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Create/Edit Calculated Fields A calculated field is a field that is created instead of pulled directly from a source table. Use the following steps to begin the process to create a new calculated field or to modify an existing calculated field. Note: For SAP connections only, calculated fields are limited to basic arithmetic functions add (+), subtract (-), multiply (*) and divide (/), and signs must be bounded by spaces (i.e. X + Y, not X+Y). To Create a New Calculated Field: 1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field for which to add the calculated field below, right click and select Add Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears. 2. All calculated fields are defined in this panel (see Select Fields from a Table, Create Date Fields, Use the CASE Builder, GEXD Row, and Get Values). To Edit an Existing Calculated Field: 1. On the Field List panel, select the desired calculated field to be edited and double click -or- right click and select Edit Calculated Field. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel, make any necessary changes and click OK. 3. Additional changes may be made to a calculated field on the Field List panel, such as changing the field type or assigning an alias field name (see Field List Panel and Assign Aliases to Fields).

301 Query Designer Select Fields from a Table Often files do not store data in the form which is desired, but various fields in the file may be combined (i.e. added or subtracted) to obtain the desired result. The Builder may be used to create an expression using fields directly from source tables to obtain the desired value. Example - Calculate the Amount Paid for an Invoice: Calculate the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount (RPAAP) from the gross invoice amount (RPAG). 1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 3. From the Field Listings panel, double click the desired field (RPAG in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 4. In the work area, enter any math symbols by typing them -or- by clicking the appropriate operation button (if available) (a minus sign in this example). 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary until the expression is complete (RPAAP was selected in this example). 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. Global Software, Inc.

302 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the alias for the field and click OK.

303 Query Designer Create Date Fields Occasionally date fields in the source tables are not in a true date format as recognized by Excel. When this occurs it may be necessary to convert the field value to a date format. Below are samples of date fields in other formats (C = century, YY = year, MM = month, DD = day): YYDDD - Julian date format used by Infinium CYYDDD - Julian date format used by JDE YYYYDDD - Julian date format used by Jack Henry YYMMDD - date format used by BPCS Note: Date formats are not exclusive to the ledgers listed above. Query Designer provides a Date Conversion option on the Builder panel to convert these formats into true date formats. Example - Converting a JDE Julian Date to a True Date Calculated Field: Convert the AP invoice date field (RPDIVJ), a Julian date field in JDE, to a true date calculated field. In this scenario, the host system is an iseries (AS/400). 1. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 2. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 3. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). 4. On the iseries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CYYDDD. The conversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel. Global Software, Inc.

304 296 Spreadsheet Server - Version Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. 6. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field (Invoice Date in this example) and click OK. 7. Sample query results. Note: OLEDB iseries connections display dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, where as ODBC connections display dates as MM/DD/YYYY.

305 Query Designer Use the CASE Builder The Builder provides a tool to aid in constructing CASE statements. CASE statements may be used as calculated fields or as selection criteria. Note: For SAP connections only, CASE statements are not applicable. Example - Build a CASE Statement: Look for null (or zero) AP invoice dates (RPDIVJ) and replace them with a predefined date to prevent errors, and then convert the remaining dates, to a true date calculated field. 1. On the Builder panel iseries tab, click the CASE Builder button. The Case Builder panel appears. 2. In the WHEN field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the WHEN field to select a field from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example). Global Software, Inc.

306 298 Spreadsheet Server - Version In this example a single field is being selected from a source table (see Select Fields from a Table). On the Builder panel: Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example). Select (double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). The selected value <lib.file.field> appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 4. Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression (&lib.f0411.rpdivj in this example) is pushed to WHEN field on the CASE Builder panel. 5. On the CASE Builder panel, use the drop down list to select the appropriate expression operator (equal (=) in this example). A new field appears to the right of the Expression Operator field.

307 Query Designer In the new field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the new field to select a field from a table (zero (0) has been keyed in this example). 7. In the THEN field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the THEN field to select a field from a table (DATE('01/01/1900') has been keyed in this example). 8. Click the ADD Expression button. This starts the CASE statement in the CASE Builder work area. 9. If additional WHEN expressions are required, then edit the WHEN and THEN fields as necessary. When the revised expression is complete, click the ADD Expression button again. The revised expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area. Repeat this process for as many fields as necessary for the CASE statement. 10. In the ELSE field, enter the desired value -or- click the Builder button adjacent to the ELSE field to select a field from a table (the Builder button is being used in this example). 11. In this example a Julian date is being selected and converted to a true date field (see Create Date Fields). On the Builder panel: Click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. Select the desired source table (F0411 in this example). Select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPDIVJ in this example). On the iseries tab, click the down arrow for the Date Conversion field and select the value CCYYDDD. The conversion expression appears in the work area on the Builder panel. Global Software, Inc.

308 300 Spreadsheet Server - Version Click OK on the Builder panel. The expression is pushed to the ELSE field on the CASE Builder panel. 13. Click the ADD Else button. The else expression is added to the current CASE statement in the work area.

309 Query Designer Click the Done button. The completed CASE statement appears the original Builder work area. 15. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list. 16. To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field and click OK. Global Software, Inc.

310 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 GEXD Row The Builder functional button, %GEXDROW%, is used to return the Excel row number for each row of data when the GEXD is generated in Excel. This function may be used to create a calculated field, and may remove the need of using fill down columns in Excel. Note: Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, the expression %EXDROW% was used instead of %GEXDROW%. The system continues to support the legacy %EXDROW% expression. Example - Using GEXD Row Function to Create a Calculated Field: Use the GEXD Row function to create a calculated field which will calculate/report the amount paid by subtracting the open invoice amount column from the gross invoice amount column in Excel. Initial Set Up: 1. Create a new query, retrieving gross invoice amount and open invoice amount (see below). To Add a Calculated Field using the GEXD Row Function: 1. On the Field List panel select the field, right click and Select Add a Calculated Field on the Field List popup menu. The Builder panel appears. 2. In the work area on the Builder panel, enter the appropriate to build the expression. In this example the following has been entered: Type ' (a single quote). From the operation buttons, click = (Equal). Type D (capital letter D). From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%. From the operation buttons, click - (Minus). Type E (capital letter E) From the Misc tab, click %GEXDROW%. Type ' (a single quote). 3. Click OK. The Field List panel appears, displaying the calculated field, with an alias of "Expr1", at the bottom of the list.

311 Query Designer To modify the alias field name for the calculated field, on the Field List panel select the field, right click and select Alias (AS nnnnnn) from the Field List popup menu. On the Modify Alias panel, enter the desired alias for the field (Amount Paid) and click OK. 5. From the Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. 6. From the Ribbon, select Home>Single Record to execute the query. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying one record. 7. In Excel create a GEXD formula with the following values (see Create and Use GEXD formulas). Select the query name identified in step 5. Specify the target worksheet. Type the Starting Cell/Range/Table. Select to Include Headings. Specify the cell reference for the Smart Parm. 8. Select the cell containing the GEXD formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Generate Reports>Selected Detail Report (GEXD Formula) -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Generate This Detail Report (GEXD). The % GEXDROW% creates a calculation, subtracting column E from column D, for all rows included in the generated data output. This functions similar to the GEXD fill down columns feature. Global Software, Inc.

312 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Get Values The Builder provides a Get Values button to display a list of the existing field values for a selected field. From the list, values may be selected and used as arguments/criteria in a variety of Builder functions. The Limit Get Values to nnn Records option in QD settings determines the maximum number of values retrieved. Example - Using Get Values in an IN( ) Statement: Add selection criteria to only retrieve records where Line Number (RPLNID) equals 10000, or On Field List panel for the desired field (RPLNID in this example), click the ellipse button located in one of the seven criteria fields. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Tables. The system expands the list of selected source tables. 3. From the expanded table list, select the source table which contains the field to be used in the expression (F0411 in this example). The system populates the Field Listing panel based upon the selected table. 4. From the Field Listings panel, select (do not double click ) the desired field (RPLNID in this example). 5. Click the Get Values button. The system displays a list of existing field values for the selected field.

313 Query Designer Select the desired field value(s): To select a single value -- select the value. To select multiple values -- press and hold the Ctrl key as values are selected on the list. To select values in a range -- select the first value in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last value in the range. Note: Double click ing a value in the list pushes the value directly to the Builder expression work area. Single click the value when an additional function is to be applied to the value before pushing it into the work area. 7. Select the desired function button. In this example the selected values (10000, and 13000) are being inserted into an IN( ) statement, so the IN ('x','x') button is clicked. The IN statement using the selected values appears in the work area on the Builder panel. Note: The IN ('x','x') button causes all arguments to be entered as text values (in single quotes). If the field is numeric, then manually remove the quote mark s. 8. When the expression is complete, click OK. Global Software, Inc.

314 306 Spreadsheet Server - Version Add Criteria Hard Coded Criteria Field selection criteria may be hard coded. These hard coded values may not be altered at query run time (i.e. in Excel). Hard coded criteria may be entered directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Example of hard coded criteria would be "Open Amount <> 0" or "Status = Active". To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Field List Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field and manually key the selection criteria (<>) in this example). To Enter Hard Coded Criteria via the Builder Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel, selection criteria may be keyed directly in the work area or by using the appropriate operation or functional buttons to develop the expression. 3. When the expression is complete, click OK.

315 Query Designer Create and Use Parameters Parameters in Query Designer vs Excel 307 Parameters are added to a query as a place-holder for when selection criteria is to be specified in Excel. A default parameter value may be defined in the query for testing purposes, and then the actual criteria is specified in Excel at the time the formula is executed. Query Designer When a query is created or modified, it is normal to execute the query in Query Designer to test the results. When testing a query parameter values are specified in the Parameters Panel. Excel Query Designer queries are executed from Excel via formulas (GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS, GEXI). Each of these formulas have arguments where parameter values may be specified. These values may be hard-coded in the formula definition; however, it is recommended to use cell references. Global Software, Inc.

316 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Standard Parameters in the Query Designer Standard Parameters allow the user full control over how the system interprets a parameter. When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and ranges of values. Note: Standard Parameters differ from Smart Parms. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processing parameters (see Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules and Smart Parms in the Query Designer). To Create a Parameter: 1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button ( ). The Add a Parameter panel appears. Use the table to enter data on the Add a Parameter panel. Field Description Parameter Description Specify a description for the parameter. Test Value Specify the default value to be used for the parameter. Sub Query Column If required, click the ellipse button ( ) to access the Select Sub Query Column panel for selecting the column name to be used for matching to drill down panel column names when determining whether the query is a valid sub query for the associated drill down. Assign Query If required, click the down arrow and select the query to be used for listing valid values for the parameter on the Build a Template panel. Click Save. The new parameter appears on the Parameters panel.

317 Query Designer 309 To Insert a Parameter into a Criteria Field: 1. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click within one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 2. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands the list of available parameters. 3. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used. 4. Double click <value as (number or string)>. The parameter, &PARM01, appears in the work area on the Builder panel. 5. Enter any comparison operators and other characters as necessary to complete the criteria expression (i.e. =&PARM01). 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the parameter inserted in the selected criteria field. Global Software, Inc.

318 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use Parameter to Supply Database/Library Name By creating a standard parameter and assigning the parameter as the database/library, the user may create a single query and connection, but process the query for multiple databases/libraries. This feature only applies to queries using an iseries or SQL Server connection type. To Use a Parameter to Supply the Database/Library Name: 1. In Query Designer, create a query and select the desired table(s). 2. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button ( Add a Parameter panel appears. 3. In the Parameter Description field key the value, &PARM01, and if desired in the Test Value field key a default database/library to be used for processing, then click OK. The new parameter appears on the Parameters panel. ) or from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Add Parameter. The Note: This new parameter must be first in the parameter list (i.e. ID = 1). 4. On the Query View panel, right click on the header section of the desired table. The Table popup menu appears. 5. Select Change Database/Library. The Select Library panel appears. 6. Select &PARM01 from the list of databases/libraries and click Select. The system displays &PARM01 in the table header section. 7. When executing the query in Query Designer or Excel, change the %PARM01 parameter value to the desired database/library to be used for processing the query.

319 Query Designer Smart Parms Criteria Entry Rules When using standard parameters the query writer must know various SQL rules for working with text fields, numeric values, lists and ranges of values. Smart Parms simplify query writing by using standard rules for processing parameters. The rules used by Smart Parms are similar to those used in Global's Spreadsheet Server products for specifying segment values. Below is a comparison by example of SQL (iseries DB2) rules for specifying criteria values used by standard parameters versus Smart Parms. Criteria Type Standard Parameters Smart Parms Single Value - Text ='ABC' ABC Single Value - Numeric = Single Value - Date =DATE('01/01/2007') 1/1/2007 Mask (wildcard) LIKE 'A%' A* Mask (wildcard) for All Values LIKE '%' * or a blank Mask (wildcard) for a Single Value LIKE '_500' *500 Range - Text (see Note) BETWEEN 'ABC' AND 'DEF' ABC.DEF Range - Numeric BETWEEN 123 AND Range - Date BETWEEN DATE('01/01/2007') AND DATE('03/31/2007') 1/1/2007.3/31/2007 Value List - Text (see Note) IN('A','B','C') [A,B,C] Value List - Numeric IN(1,2,3) [1,2,3] Value List with Exclude (see Note) N/A [AAA.CCC,/BBB] Note: May not exclude a segment list Field is Blank N/A BLANK Field is Not Blank N/A NOTBLANK Greater Than or Equal To >= Less Than or Equal To <= Logical NOT (using alphabet as dataset) NOT IN('A','B','C') [D.Z] Segment List N/A Field (see Note) Note: Alias as defined in the Configurator Note: The range delimiter, list separator and exclusion characters may be defined in the user's SS Settings. Field allows for using different fields in the file as criteria for retrieving data without having to change the query. With Smart Parms no comparison operators are used (=,<>,<,>,BETWEEN, LIKE, NOT). The Smart Parm routine actually converts the expression to one that uses SQL rules. Global Software, Inc.

320 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Smart Parms in the Query Designer Smart Parms may be added to a field directly on the Field List panel or via the Builder panel. Note: Prior to adding a Smart Parm to a field an alias name must be assigned to the field (see Assign Aliases to Fields). To Add Smart Parms via the Field List Panel: 1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select Add Smart Parm for This Field. A parameter for the field is added to the Parameter panel with a blank value, and the Smart Parm (&SPARM01) is inserted into the Criteria 1 field. To Add Smart Parms via the Builder Panel: Note: This method must be used to add Smart Parms in other Criteria fields besides Criteria If the parameter doesn't already exist, create it (see Standard Parameters in the Query Designer). 2. On the Field List panel, click the ellipse button -or- double click in one of the seven Criteria fields for the desired field. The Builder panel appears. 3. On the Builder panel in the Source section, click the arrow ( ) to the left of Parameters. The system expands the list of available parameters. 4. From the expanded parameter list, select the parameter to be used. 5. Double click <value as smart parm>. The Smart Parm appears in the work area on the Builder panel. No other supporting characters (i.e. =, <, >) are required. 6. Click OK. The Field List panel appears with the Smart Parm inserted in the selected criteria field.

321 Query Designer 313 To Delete Smart Parms: Note: If multiple Smart Parms exist for a query, only the last (highest number) Smart Parm in the list may be deleted. Example: Have Smart Parms 1, 2 and 3. Smart Parm 3 may be deleted; however, Smart Parm 2 may not be deleted unless Smart Parm 3 is first deleted. 1. In the Parameters panel, select the highest number Smart Parm and click Del. The system displays a confirmation panel. Click OK. The system removes the Smart Parm from the Parameters panel. 2. On the Field List panel, click the associated Smart Parm criteria field value. The Builder panel appears. Delete the Smart Parm field value. Click OK. The system removes the criteria field value from the Field List. 3. Repeat the steps above to delete additional Smart Parms. Global Software, Inc.

322 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Parameters in Excel Parameters are used in Excel in conjunction with query formulas to provide criteria for the query being executed. To Use Parameters in Excel: 1. Prior to using a new or modified query, in Excel from the SS Ribbon select Refresh or Refresh>Queries. The system refreshes query data. 2. Layout the Excel report and assign cell references for each parameter. 3. Select the cell where the query formula is to reside, then from the SS Ribbon select Formula Assistant. The Formula Assistant panel appears. 4. Select the appropriate formula on the Formulas fly out window, assign values to the arguments, including the cell positions of the parameters. 5. Click the Insert button to save the formula into the cell. 6. To change the query criteria value, enter the new value in the cell designated and re-run the query.

323 Query Designer Sub Query Column On drill down panels in Query Designer and Spreadsheet Server, a Sub Queries option exists allowing the user to drill down from the current drill down panel to a user-defined query. The Sub Queries submenu contains a list of all the EDQ files that have column names in the Sub Query Column parameter field matching column names on the original drill down panel. Note: All Sub Query Columns defined in the detail query must be present on the original drill down panel for query to be available on the Sub Queries menu. To Create Sub Query: 1. Create the related detail query(ies) (AR Customer Master Data.edq and AR Customer Sales Summary.edq in this example) to be associated with the GXL balance or journals drill down, or initial query (AR Sales Summary.edq in this example). 2. For each related detail query on the Parameters panel, click the ellipse button in the Sub Query Column for the appropriate parameter. The Select Sub Query Column panel appears. 3. Select the folder or subdirectory for which to list queries (EDQ files). The system lists the appropriate queries. 4. Select the query for which to list available column names. The system adds the column names from the selected query to the list of available standard column names. Standard columns, %SS_KEY1%, %SS_KEY2%, %SS_KEY3%, %SS_YEAR%, %SS_FORMAT%, % SS_PERIOD%, %SS_FROMPERIOD%, and %SS_TOPERIOD%, are used for data passed to a sub query when executed from a GXL balance or journals drill down. The values for these columns are the values from the original GXL formula, thus mak ing is possible to design an EDQ as the journals sub query drill down. Standard columns, %SPARM01% through %SPARM15%, are used for data passed to a sub query when executed from a query (i.e. GEXQ, GEXD) drill down. The values for these columns are the values from the original formula s parameters. 5. Manually enter -or- double click the column name to be referenced. The selected column name is inserted into the Sub Query Column to Insert field. Global Software, Inc.

324 316 Spreadsheet Server - Version Click Insert. The selected Sub Query Column to Insert value is inserted into the Sub Query Column field on the Parameters panel. 7. Later when executing a query in Query Designer -or- when drilling down on a query, GXL balance or journals drill down in Excel, select the desired row, right click and then from the Sub Query sub menu select the appropriate detail query for which to view results. The system displays the data for the selected detail query.

325 Query Designer Assign Query A query may be created for listing valid values for another query parameter on the Build a Template panel in Excel. 1. Create a reporting query (ex. Northwind Orders.edq) and a "lookup" query (ex. Northwind Country Lookup.edq). 2. In the reporting query on the Parameters panel, click the Assign Query down arrow for the appropriate parameter and select the desired "lookup" query. Save the parameter, and save query changes. 3. In Excel on the Build a Template panel when the reporting query is selected, an ellipse button appears for the parameter (ex. Country). Click the ellipse button to execute the "lookup" query. Global Software, Inc.

326 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 GEXD Limit Query Designer allows the user to assign the number of records to be returned in Excel when a GEXD formula is generated. In addition, the GEXD limit may also be assigned as a query parameter, allowing the user the ability to modify the desired number of records as necessary. To Assign a GEXD Limit: 1. From the QD Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field specify the maximum number of records to be output in Excel for the query. Value of "0" indicates no limit to GEXD records returned in Excel. Positive integer indicates the number of records to be returned by the GEXD formula in Excel. To Assign GEXD Limit as a Parameter: 1. On the Parameters panel, click the Add button. The Add a Parameter panel appears. 2. On the Add a Parameter panel, enter a description (i.e. GEXDLimit) and a default value for the number of records to be returned when processing the GEXD, and then click Save. The new parameter is added to the Parameters panel. 3. From the QD Ribbon select Home, and then in the GEXD Limit field enter '&SPARMxx' (where xx equals the ID number assigned to the GEXD limit parameter created in the previous step), and then click Save. 4. When the query is used in Excel, the parameter created above appears allowing the user to specify the desired number of records to be returned when the query is generated.

327 Query Designer Create a Totals (Group By) Query When a query is created, by default it is a detail query -- one in which each record is displayed in the output. The query may be modified to become a totals (or group by) query, such that only summarized records are displayed. To Create a Totals Query: 1. On the Field List panel, select the field, right click and select Totals (Group By) on the Field List popup menu. The Totals column appears in on the Field List panel displaying the value "Group By" for each field except calculated fields (which have no default). 2. For each field in the list, click the down arrow and select the proper Totals value (see table below) based upon the planned output for the query. Totals Value Description Group By Displays each distinct value once per break point. Sum Sums the field for each record at the break point. Avg Averages the field at each break point. Min Displays the minimum value for the field at each break point. Max Displays the maximum value for the field at each break point. Count Counts the records for the field at each break point. StDev Displays the standard deviation for the field at each break point. Var Displays the variance for the field at each break point. First Displays the first value for the field. Last Displays the last value for the field. Expression Does not assign a Group By value, but is used for calculated fields where the Group By value has already been assigned in the definition of the field. Where For "Visible" fields, use when criteria will be applied to the grouped field. This is expressed in the SQL code as a HAVING statement. For fields that are not "Visible", use when criteria will be applied at a detail record level. This is expressed in the SQL code as a WHERE statement. Global Software, Inc.

328 320 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Contrast of Detail Output to Totaled Output: Example 1 - Detail Output (each output record visible): Example 2 - Totaled Output (one output record per vendor):

329 Query Designer Create the GEXQ Field A GEXQ (summary) field is used to summarize (i.e. total, count, average) a selected numeric field. In Excel a GEXQ formula is then used to return a single value from the GEXQ (summary) portion of a query into a spreadsheet. A user may then drill down upon the summary value to see detailed results (see GEXQ Formulas). To Designate a Field as an GEXQ Summary Field: 1. On the Field List panel, select the desired field, right click and select GEXQ (Summary) Field. The Summary Type panel appears. 2. On the Summary Type panel, select the desired summary type. Note: If a field is an expression that already contains a summary type (e.g. SUM(RPAAP)), then select the Summary Type as Embedded to avoid syntax lik e Sum(Sum(...)). 3. Click the Save button. The resulting field will be designated with a 4. Defining a field as the GEXQ summary field also creates SQL code that is executed when the GEXQ is run from Excel. This code is displayed on the SQL Text panel on the GEXQ tab. Global Software, Inc. symbol in the Field List panel.

330 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 SQL SHELL Function The SHELL function creates a dynamic cross application functionality with Query Designer. Using the text SHELL within the SQL Text panel followed by an external program or file name, adds versatility to the SQL statement by launching the external program and/or opening the file or image providing access to additional data. This function allows the user to process anything which could be processed in the RUN command in Windows. The SHELL statement may be used as part of a query detail drill down. Example - SHELL Statement Used to Access a Vendor Voucher in a Word Document: In this example, the query has two parameters, Vendor # and Voucher #, and the Amount Gross field is an GEXQ summary field. 1. In the SQL Text panel, change to manual entry mode): De-select the Auto Generate check box. Click No to not copy the auto-generated SQL text. 2. Within the SQL Text panel, key the text SHELL, press Enter, and key the additional text required to run the command or launch the external program. In this example C:\PO\&PARM02.docx has been keyed, indicating: C:\PO\ -- The network directory location of the target file. &PARM02 -- The Voucher # parameter defined in Query Designer and used in Excel cell reference..docx -- The file extension of the target file. 3. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Save Query. 4. In Excel, add the GEXQ formula. Use cell references for the parameters. 5. To execute the SHELL statement, select the cell containing the GEXQ formula, then from the SS Ribbon select Drill Down -or- right click and select Spreadsheet Server>Drill Down. The SHELL statement is executed (opens the Microsoft Word document C:\PO\12324.docx in this example).

331 Query Designer Execute Query Once all fields have been selected and added to the Field List panel, it is suggested to run a quick test to verify the query setup. To Execute a Single Query: 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home and then select the appropriate Execute Query function. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying query results based upon the option selected. Note: A similar panel is also displayed when a drill down is performed on a GEXQ or GEXI formula in Excel. Click the link to go to a related topic: General Grid Features or Copy/Export Records. To Execute Multiple Queries: 1. In Query Designer open the first query, then from the QD Ribbon select Home and then select the appropriate Execute Query function. The ResultsContainer panel appears displaying query results based upon the option selected. 2. Leave the ResultsContainer panel open, but close the query. 3. Open the second query, then from the QD Ribbon select Home and then select the appropriate Execute Query function. A new tab appears in the open ResultsContainer panel displaying query results based upon the option selected. Global Software, Inc.

332 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

333 Query Designer Legacy Ad Hoc Queries Prior to Spreadsheet Server V14R1M1, users had the ability to create ad hoc queries in Query Designer which enabled the user to drill down from the results view of a query to detail data associated with another query. As of V14R1M1, this feature is being replaced with the sub query processing (see Sub Query Column). The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries function displays preexisting ad hoc queries, allowing the user to determine which current queries need to be modified (assigned Sub Query Column criteria). Contact Global for assistance in updating existing queries to utilize sub query processing. To Access Legacy Ad Hoc Queries: 1. Close all queries. 2. From the QD Ribbon, select View>Legacy Ad Hoc Queries. The Legacy Ad Hoc Queries panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

334 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Query Management Once a query has been created, various functions are available to maintain, clone, delete or lock/unlock a query. To Modify a Query Description: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Change Description. The Description panel appears. 2. On the Description panel, key the desired description. 3. Click OK. To Clone a Query: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Clone from the File System tab on the QD Ribbon. The Clone Query panel appears. 2. On the Clone Query panel, enter a query name for the clone. 3. Click OK. The new query appears in the list of available queries. To Delete a Query: 1. From the list of EDQ files select the desired query, right click and select Clone Query -or- select Delete from the File System tab on the QD Ribbon. The Delete File panel appears. 2. Click Yes. The query is removed from the list of available queries. To Lock a Query: Open the desired query. From the QD Ribbon select Home>Un-Locked. The Lock Query panel appears. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password to be used to protect the query. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the query is locked. To Unlock a Query: Open the desired query. From the QD Ribbon select Home>Locked. The Unlock panel appears. Click Yes. The Password Protection panel appears. On the Password Protection panel, enter the password previously assigned to lock the query. Click OK. A confirmation panel appears, confirming that the lock has been removed for the query.

335 Query Designer Download or Send Query Exchange Queries Query Exchange is an online depository of queries. Query Designer allows the user to access the online query depository, download selected queries to the Query Designer and then utilize them in Excel. In addition, a Query Designer user may send an existing query from Query Designer to Query Exchange. A user's ability to access Query Exchange is determined by a user setting in the Configurator. Note: Must be connected to the internet to have access to the Query Exchange component. To Download a Query from Query Exchange: 1. From within Query Designer: In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select Home>Search Online. Query Exchange opens. From within Excel: In Excel, access either the Build a Template or Formula Assistant panel and select the appropriate GEXQ, GEXD, GEXS or GEXI formula or tab. Click the Search Online button ( 2. ). Query Exchange opens. Continue with step 2 in the Download Queries from Query Exchange section. To Send a Query to Query Exchange: 1. In Query Designer, open the desired query to be sent. 2. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Send to Query Exchange. The query is sent to Query Exchange. Global reviews all queries prior to promoting them to Query Exchange. Note: If a description does not exist for the selected query, a prompt panel appears requiring the user to enter a query description. Global Software, Inc.

336 328 Spreadsheet Server - Version Textual Query Definition Use the Textual Query Definition function is as a convenient way to document queries. 1. Open the query. 2. From the QD Ribbon, select Home>Definition. Windows Notepad opens displaying the query definition. Sample Textual Query Definition: Query Name: AP Open Invoices Query File Name: P:\E-Dash\GSI Queries\AP Open Invoices.edq Tables/Files in query: Table: F0411 Table: F0101 Relationships: Inner Join (ACCOUNTS PAYABLE LEDGER) (ADDRESS BOOK MASTER) F0411. RPAN8 = F0101. ABAN8 Selected Fields: F0411 F0101 F0411 F0411 F RPAN8 ABALPH RPDOC RPAG RPAAP Alias: Alias: Alias: Alias: Alias: "Vendor #" Sort= "Vendor Name" "Voucher #" "AmountGross" "AmountOpen" Ascending Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=True Calculated Field: "AmountRemaining" &lib.f0411.rpag/100 - &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 Alias: "AmountRemaining" Visible=True Sort= none) Calculated Field: "Invoice Date" CASE WHEN &lib.f0411.rpdivj = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.f0411.rpdivj ,7,0)) ) END Alias: "Invoice Date" F0411. RPDIVJ Parameters PARM01 Sort= (none) Alias: "Invoice Date Julian" Description Value Vendor # 459 Criteria: F0411. RPAN8 F0411. RPAAP F0411. RPDIVJ &SPARM01 <>0 <>0 Visible=True Sort= (none) Visible=False

337 Query Designer Summarize (GEXQ): 329 RPAAP Detail SQL (AUTO): SELECT &lib.f0411.rpan8 AS "Vendor #", &lib.f0101.abalph AS "Vendor Name", &lib.f0411.rpdoc AS "Voucher #", &lib.f0411.rpag/100 AS "AmountGross", &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 AS "AmountOpen", &lib.f0411.rpag/100 - &lib.f0411.rpaap/100 "AmountRemaining", CASE WHEN &lib.f0411.rpdivj = 0 THEN DATE('01/01/1900') ELSE DATE(DIGITS( DECIMAL( &lib.f0411.rpdivj ,7,0)) ) END AS "Invoice Date" FROM ((&lib.f0411 INNER JOIN &lib.f0101 ON WHERE (((&lib.f0411.rpan8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.f0411.rpdivj)<>0) ) ORDER BY "Vendor #" GEXQ SQL (AUTO): SELECT SUM(&lib.F0411.RPAAP/100) as GEXQ FROM ((&lib.f0411 INNER JOIN &lib.f0101 ON WHERE (((&lib.f0411.rpan8) &SPARM01 ) AND ((&lib.f0411.rpdivj)<>0) ) Global Software, Inc. (&lib.f0411.rpan8=&lib.f0101.aban8))) ((&lib.f0411.rpaap/100)<>0) AND (&lib.f0411.rpan8=&lib.f0101.aban8))) ((&lib.f0411.rpaap/100)<>0) AND AS

338 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 QD View Log During all processing, various logging information is recorded. If the QD Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional error message logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Query Designer from the QD Ribbon, select View>View Log File. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time and description for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Nav Tip: This panel may also be accessed by selecting the View Log button on the QD Settings panel. 2. See SS View Log for additional information regarding the View Log function.

339 Distribution Manager 10 Distribution Manager 10.1 DM Navigation 331 Distribution Manager (DM) uses the following navigation methods for processing functions within Excel. Each function is not always available from each method. Spreadsheet Server Ribbon (see DM Ribbon) Distribution Manager Right Click Context Menu (see DM Right Click Context Menu) NAVIGATION TIPS: Throughout the manual navigation tips, noted by the convention "NAV TIP", will be listed indicating the various paths available to access a function. Global Software, Inc.

340 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 DM Ribbon After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon is added in Excel. Use the options in the Distribution Manager (DM) group of the SS ribbon to access/process functions in the application. Menu Item Description Distribute Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Click the arrow to access additional functions (see Distribute Specifications). All Distributes all specifications within the workbook. Selected Distributes only selected specifications. Clone Sheet Creates a copy of the current worksheet, leaving all formulas intact. Clone Sheet as Values Creates a copy of the current worksheet, converting all formulas to values. New Control Sheet Creates a new distribution control worksheet (see Create a Distribution Control Worksheet). Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and Maintain Specification Rows). Settings Opens the Distribution Manager Settings panel, allowing the user to define various criteria to control processing, and to access the Log Viewer panel where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM Settings and DM View Log).

341 Distribution Manager DM Right Click Context Menu After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a Distribution Manager (DM) right click context menu is added in the Cell menu for the Normal and Page Layout views in Excel. Use the DM right click context menu to access/process various functions within the application. Menu Item Description Maintain Specs Opens the Maintain Specifications panel, allowing the user to create and/or maintain distribution criteria (see Add Specification Rows and Maintain Specification Rows). Distribute Selected Distributes only selected specifications (see Distribute Specifications). Global Software, Inc.

342 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 DM Settings Spreadsheet Server (SS) Settings allow the user to define various criteria to control processing. 1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel, or to access other functions. Field Description General Options: Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see DM View Log). Always Save Workbook Prior to Distribution If selected, all workbook changes are automatically saved prior to distribution. Consolidate s If selected, multiple specification rows for a recipient in a distribution run are combined into a single with multiple attachments (one for each specification row). Otherwise, one is issued per specification row.

343 Distribution Manager Field 335 Description Include Members When Only the Master is Selected If selected and only the group master specification row is selected for distribution, the system distributes the master and all member rows (as if the master and all member rows were individually selected). Otherwise, only selected specification rows are distributed. Right Justify Text Fields If selected, all text fields are right justified. Enable Distributor Addin for Word If selected, the system enables the Distributor add-in in Word. The Distributor add-in must be enabled in order to process Narrative Reporting via Distribution Manager. Note: The Distributor add-in may also be manually enabled and/or disabled via Word. PDF Creation: Specify when distributing to PDF whether to use the default Gobal provided component, the Excel Save As PDF component, or a specific printer to convert objects to PDF. When the PDF Printer option is selected, then key the path or use the Browse button to select the printer to be used to convert objects to PDF. If blank, the system uses the Adobe PDF printer (if it exists), else it uses the default printer. Note: When using Adobe, the Adobe Distiller product is required to convert a document to a PDF file. The Distiller is not available for those users with only the Adobe Reader installed. Note: For Excel 2007 users, the 2007 Microsoft Office Add-In Microsoft Save as PDF or XPS must be downloaded to the user's PC to utilize the Excel Save As PDF option. Convert Formulas to Values Default: Specify the option to default for the Convert Formulas to Value field when adding a new distribution specification row. Button Description View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may see information and error log entries, copy selected log entries, or clear the log file (see DM View Log). Global Software, Inc.

344 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the panel. Field Description Options: Server Specify the server to be used for distributions. When SMTP is selected, additional setting options become available for input. Note: For Excel 2007 users, Collaboration Data Objects (CDO) must be installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component. Note: For Excel 2010 (or above) users, Distributor Outlook Add-In must be installed for the Microsoft Outlook Exchange option to be available. When applicable, a link is available to install the component with the ability to Run as Administrator if necessary. Note: When using SMTP certain mail configurations may prevent the transmission of messages. Contact your IT department for assistance. HTML When using server options Outlook 2010 (or above) or SMTP, if selected HTML editor is used for the body contents. Otherwise, plain text editor is utilized. Cache Address Book For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, if selected the address book is cached to prevent long waits when loading the address book. Note: When cached lists exist and the user deselects the option, a prompt appears ask ing if the lists should be deleted.

345 Distribution Manager 337 Field Description SMTP Options: When the SMTP server option is selected the following options are available for input: SMTP Mail Server Specify the SMTP mail server to be used for distributions. SMTP Sent "From" Address Specify the "from" address to be assigned to distributions. SMTP Advanced Options (Optional): When the SMTP server option is selected, if necessary, specify optional settings for the authentication account name and password, the SMTP port number, and SSL (secured socket layer) support. 4. The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online user manual. 5. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

346 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Create a Distribution Control Worksheet The columns on a distribution control worksheet are predefined by Global and should not be changed. However, the rows defined on a distribution control worksheet will depend upon an organization's reporting requirements. Note: The examples in this documentation are meant only to demonstrate the capabilities of the product. 1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Create New Distribution Control Worksheet. The Create a New Distribution Control Worksheet panel appears. 2. Enter the New Worksheet name, and click Create. The Maintain Specifications panel appears.

347 Distribution Manager Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - General tab. Field Description Destination: Type Click the down arrow and select the destination type for the distribution. Valid types are , File Save, Group (member specification row that distributes only to the group master), and Print. Note: When printing the system prints to the user's default printer. Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distribution. The name must be unique for each specification row. If left blank, the current workbook name is used. If left blank on multiple specification rows, the current workbook name and an appended sequence number is used. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group. File Type Click the down arrow and select the file type for the distribution. Valid types are Excel, Excel (xlsx), Excel (xlsm), Excel (xls), CSV, HTML, PDF, None (do not distribute any sheets from the workbook; only applies when Type = ), and Word (distribute a Word document (see Narrative Reporting)). When the type Excel is selected, the system assigns the current workbook type. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group. Folder When Destination Type = File Save, key the path or use the Browse button to select the folder location where the document will be saved. The destination location must be different than the source location. See the example below. Modify Cells: This section indicates the worksheet cells to receive designated values. To add cell parameters, click the down arrow and select the worksheet, enter the cell and value information, and then click the Add button. The parameters are displayed in the window below. To modify cell parameters, select the line in the window, and make the appropriate change(s). To remove a cell parameter, select the line in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all parameter lines, click the Clear button. Example: For worksheet Income Statement, cell H4 will contain the value 5 (reporting period), and cell H6 will contain the value (reporting company). Worksheet Specify the worksheet to receive the data. Cell Specify the cell to receive the data. Value Specify the value to be placed in the defined cell. Global Software, Inc.

348 340 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Specify Worksheets: This section indicates the worksheets and chart objects from the active workbook to be included in the distribution. If blank, then all worksheets in the workbook will be distributed. When Destination File Type = HTML, at least one worksheet must be specified. To select a worksheet, click the down arrow and select the desired worksheet, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Add button. The selected worksheet displays in the window below. To select all worksheets, select whether or not to hide zero lines, and then click the Add All button. All worksheets appear in the window below. To remove a worksheet, select the worksheet in the window, and click the Remove button. To remove all worksheets, click the Clear button. To control the order of worksheets in the distributed workbook, select the worksheet in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the selected worksheet up or down in the list. Example: The Income Statement and Expanded Report worksheets have been selected, the target sheet names have been assigned and the hide zero lines option has been selected for both worksheets. Hide Zero Lines Default Specify the default value to be assigned when a worksheet is added to the selection. When no worksheets are selected, this option determines whether or not to hide zero lines for all distributed worksheets. Worksheet Specify the worksheet to be distributed. Target Sheet Name Specify the name to be assigned to the distributed worksheet. The name may be hard coded, a cell reference or merge data. Note: When using cell reference, syntax should begin with "=" (i.e. "=Sheet2!A3"). The "=" is not required when using merge data syntax (see Merge Data). Hide Zero Lines If selected, worksheet rows with zero values are hidden. This option only applies to rows with Global formulas. Protect Sheet If selected, the worksheet is protected during the distribution process. Note: The password to be used to unprotect the sheet is defined on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab.

349 Distribution Manager 341 Field Description Word Documents: When the Destination File Type = Word, this section replaces the Specify Worksheets section and indicates the Word documents to be included in the distribution. At least one document or folder must be specified. To select a document, click the Select File button, navigate to and select the desired document. The selected document displays in the window. To select all documents in a folder, click the Select Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder. The selected folder displays in the window. To remove a document, select the document in the window, and click the Remove button. To remove all documents, click the Clear button. See Narrative Reporting for more information. Convert Formulas to Values: Click the down arrow and specify which formulas, if any, should be converted to values. Valid options are Global Only (formulas created from Spreadsheet Server), All Formulas (all formulas on the worksheet) and None (no conversion). Note: If a formula references another sheet for parameters and the parameter sheet is not included in the distribution, then the formula will be converted to a value regardless of the Convert Formulas to Values option selected. Remove Non-Distributed Sheets Prior to Processing If selected, non-distributed worksheets are removed prior to distributing in order to enhance performance time. When this option is selected, it is important to note that sheets being distributed may not reference non-distributed sheets. Recalculate Before Sending: Specify whether or not to recalculate the worksheet(s), or to clear and recalculate PC cache before distributing. Note: If using DM to modify a cell, the work sheet is always recalculated regardless of the Recalculate Before Sending option selected. Generate GXEs If selected, all Spreadsheet Server GXE formulas are generated prior to distribution. Generate GEXDs If selected, all Spreadsheet Server GEXD formulas are generated prior to distribution. Zip Destination If selected, the workbook is zipped prior to distribution. This option does not apply when Destination Type = Group or Print. SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications. Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Insert After Active Row If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel. Active Row Global Software, Inc. Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet.

350 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - tab. Note: The tab is only available when Destination Type = . Field Description To Specify the address(es) or when applicable click the To button to select the address(es) to which to distribute the associated document. Multiple addresses should be separated by a semicolon (;) or comma (,) depending on the server type. Note: The DM Settings' Consolidate s option controls whether a recipient included on multiple specification rows in a distribution run receives one with multiple attachments or one per specification row (see DM Settings). Subject Specify the subject line for the . Body Specify the body text for the . Generally a plain text editor is utilized; however, HTML editor offering various editing options (i.e. fonts, tables, insert pictures, etc.) may be available (see DM Settings).

351 Distribution Manager Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Grouping tab. Note: Grouping is used to combine multiple specification rows' specified work sheet(s) into a single work book for distribution purposes. Refer to the example given on the panel. This tab is not available when Destination File Type = Word. Field Description Group Master SPEC If selected, the specification row is a group master. When pushed to the Distribution Control worksheet, the value [GROUP SPEC #n] (where n is a system generated number) is assigned in the SPEC Group Control column. Note: Multiple group masters may be defined per work book. Member of Group Click the down arrow and select the destination name of the group master to which the specification row is a group member. When pushed to the Distribution Control worksheet, the system assigns the number associated with the group master in the SPEC Group Control column. Global Software, Inc.

352 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Maintain Specifications - Misc tab. Field Description Protection Passwords: Open Workbook/PDF / Protect Document Specify the password, if necessary, required to open the distributed workbook, PDF or document. Modify Workbook / Restrict Editing (Read Only) Specify the password, if necessary, required to modify the distributed workbook or document. Protect Sheet Specify the password, if necessary, required to unprotect sheets in the workbook which were protected during the distribution process. Workbook Macros: Beginning (Prior to Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed prior to distribution. Middle (Default) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed during distribution. Ending (After Processing) Specify the name of the macro, if any, to be executed after distribution.

353 Distribution Manager Field Description Additional Attachments: This section indicates additional documents to attach during the distribution process. To select a document, click the Add button, then browse and select the desired document. To remove an attachment, select the attachment in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all attachments, click the Clear button. Note: Attachments do not distribute when Destination Type = Print. Attachment Displays the name and location of the item to be sent as an attachment to the distribution. Merge Document Range Name Specify the range name from which to pull refreshed data elements into the associated attachment (see Merge Data). Once all data has been properly entered, use the table to select the appropriate row to be updated. Field Description SPECS Row Placement: This section indicates on which Excel row to place the specifications. Replace Active Row If selected, specifications are pushed to the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Insert After Active Row If selected, specifications are inserted on a new row below the current active row on the Distribution Control sheet. Current SPECS Row Displays the row number of the specifications being displayed on the panel. Active Row Displays the current active row on the Distribution Control worksheet. 8. Click the Push button to replace or insert the specifications on the Distribution Control worksheet. 9. Repeat steps 3-8 as necessary to create additional specification rows. 10. Click the Quit button. The Distribution Control worksheet appears. 11. Save the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

354 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Add Specification Rows Additional specification rows may be added to an existing Distribution Control worksheet by creating a new row or copying an existing row. To Add a New Specification Row: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select a blank row, then from the DM Ribbon select Maintain Specs -orright click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To Copy an Existing Row to Create a New Specification Row: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be copied, then from the DM Ribbon select Maintain Specs -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row, ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To copy an additional existing row to create a new row: On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be copied. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. The specifications from the current active row will default on the panel. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To create a new specification row, ensure that the Insert After Active Row radio button is selected.

355 Distribution Manager Maintain Specification Rows Existing specification rows may be maintained by accessing the Maintain Specifications panel or by manually typing changes on the Distribution Control worksheet. To Maintain an Existing Row Via the Maintain Specifications Panel: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired specification row to be maintained, then from the DM Ribbon select Maintain Specs -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Maintain Specs. The Maintain Specifications panel appears. 2. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. 3. To maintain an additional existing row: On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the next specification row to be maintained. On the Maintain Specifications panel, click the Retrieve SPECS From Current Excel Row button. The specifications from the current active row will default on the panel. Continue with step 3 in the Create a Distribution Control Worksheet section. To maintain the existing specification row, ensure that the Replace Active Row radio button is selected. To Maintain an Existing Row Manually: 1. On the Distribution Control worksheet, select the desired cell to be modified, and click on the down arrow to change data in the cell -or- type the desired information into the cell. Note: To avoid errors, it is recommended to use the Maintain Specifications panel (see above) for mak ing changes instead of typing the desired information into the cell. 2. Save the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

356 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Distribute Specifications Distribution specifications for a workbook may be distributed all at the same time or individually selected specifications may be distributed at the same time. Note: If the DM Settings option Always Save Prior to Distribution is not selected, it is imperative to save the work book prior to distributing specifications. Outlook must be open prior to distributing s via Outlook. To Distribute All Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Distribute All. During the distribution process, a panel briefly appears displaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process is complete. To Distribute Individual Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. Select the desired specification row(s) to be distributed: To select a single specification -- select the desired specification row. To select multiple specifications -- press and hold the Ctrl key as specifications rows are selected. To select multiple specifications in a range -- select the first specification row in the range and drag the mouse to select additional desired rows in the range. 3. After the desired specification row(s) are selected, from the DM Ribbon select Distribute>Distribute Selected -orright click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. During the distribution process, a panel briefly appears displaying the various procedures being processed. This panel disappears when the distribution process is complete. To Distribute Group Master and All Member Specifications Using Single Row Selection: 1. Access the DM Settings panel, select the Include Members When Only Master Selected option and click OK. 2. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 3. Select the desired group master specification row to be distributed, then from the DM Ribbon select Distribute>Distribute Selected -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. The system distributes the group master and all member specification rows. To Distribute Group Master and Selected Member Specifications: 1. Open the desired Distribution Control worksheet. 2. Select the desired group master and member specification rows to be distributed, then from the DM Ribbon select Distribute>Distribute Selected -or- right click and select Distribution Manager>Distribute Selected. The system distributes the group master and selected member specification rows.

357 Distribution Manager 10.7 Miscellaneous DM Items Merge Data 349 Distribution Manager allows the user to add merge fields (place holders for data) in various specification fields, and then replace the merge fields with values during the distribution process. In addition, these merge fields may be used to update associated fields within an attached document. See below for one example of how this feature may be set up and utilized. Note: When using Microsoft Word 2013, in order for Distribution Manager to run the Word Merge, the Word option, Open attachments and other uneditable files in reading view, must not be selected. Syntax: {'Sheet Name'!Cell Reference} Setup 1: Define merge fields within the spreadsheet, and assign a range name. Setup 2: Use Modify Cells to replace word merge data, and specify merge data in part of target sheet name. If desired, specify merge data within the Destination Name and Target Sheet Name fields. Global Software, Inc.

358 350 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Setup 3: Specify merge data within the To, Subject and Body fields. Setup 4: Add an attachment and assign the range name from which to retrieve values. Results: The system modifies cells and replaces text within the curly brackets { } with the actual values from the cells. In addition, the destination name is automatically added as a prefix to the distributed merge data attachment and the data in the merge range is merged into the attachment.

359 Distribution Manager Narrative Reporting Distribution Manager allows for processing narrative reporting -- creating a Word document, populating it with data from an Excel workbook, and then distributing the Word document via Distribution Manager. Below is a general overview of the setup steps required for narrative reporting. Note: Prior to creating the narrative reporting Word document, ensure Distributor is enabled as an add-in in Word. This may be done via DM Settings. Setup 1: Create the Excel workbook from which to retrieve data. Setup 2: Create the Word document and enter the appropriate replacement formulas, specifying what data is to be populated with data from the Excel Workbook. See Distributor Formula Assistant for detailed instructions. Global Software, Inc.

360 352 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Setup 3: In the Excel workbook, define a DMSPEC to distribute the Word document. Results: The system replaces the formulas with data from the Excel workbook and distributes the Word document.

361 Distribution Manager Distributor Ribbon After Distributor is initiated as an add-in to Word, a custom Distributor ribbon is added in Word. Menu Item Description Formula Assistant Toggles to open or hide the Distributor formula assistant pane, allowing the user to enter parameters for a formula. Preview Previews the document with data retrieved from the selected workbook template. Browse Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate and select a workbook template. Click the arrow to access additional functions. Select Workbook Template Opens a browser panel, allowing the user to locate and select a workbook template. Open Workbook Template Opens the selected workbook template in Excel. Remove Workbook Removes the selected workbook template from the document. Select SPEC for Refresh Opens the Select SPEC panel, allowing the user to select a SPEC to be used when previewing the document and refreshing the workbook template. Remove SPEC Removes the selected SPEC to be used when refreshing the workbook template. Global Software, Inc.

362 354 Spreadsheet Server - Version Distributor Formula Assistant The Formula Assistant is a tool used to aid in quickly creating replacement formulas in a Word document. Note: Prior to creating the narrative reporting Word document, ensure Distributor is enabled as an add-in in Word. This may be done via DM Settings. 1. In Word open the desired document. 2. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Formula Assistant. The Distributor pane appears. 3. Use the table to enter data on the Distributor pane. 4. Field Description Workbook Object Type Click the down arrow and select the workbook object type to be retrieved by the formula. Valid types are Cell, Chart, Pivot and Range. Object Value Specify the value from the workbook to be retrieved by the formula. Syntax: 'Sheet Name'!ABC (where ABC = cell reference, chart, pivot table or range name) Paste Method Click the down arrow and select the appropriate method for pasting the value retrieved by the formula into the document. Valid methods are K - Keep Source Formatting, M - Merge Formatting, S - Use Destination Styles, T Keep Text Only and U - Picture. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icons. Apply -- inserts the formula to the current location in the document. Copy -- copies the formula to the Windows clipboard. Paste -- pastes the formula from the Windows clipboard to the current location in the document.

363 Distribution Manager Preview Narrative Reporting Results After the desired replacement formulas have been entered in the Word document, the distributed narrative reporting results may be previewed. Results may be previewed using the current values in the associated workbook template or using a selected SPEC line to refresh the workbook and then display results. 1. In Word from the Distributor Ribbon, select Browse, then navigate to and select the desired workbook template. The selected workbook displays on the ribbon. To Preview using Current Values in the Workbook Template: 2. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Preview. The system opens a new document displaying the results based upon the current data in the selected workbook. To Preview using Selected SPEC line from the Workbook Template: 3. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Browse>Select SPEC for Refresh. The Select SPEC panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

364 356 Spreadsheet Server - Version On the Select SPEC panel, select the desired SPEC line to be used for previewing and click OK. The selected SPEC displays on the ribbon. 5. From the Distributor Ribbon, select Preview. The system opens a new document displaying the results based upon the selected SPEC line. 6. To change the selected SPEC line being used for preview, from the Distributor Ribbon select Browse>Select SPEC for Refresh. The Select SPEC panel appears. Select the desired SPEC and click OK. The selected SPEC displays on the ribbon. 7. To remove the selected SPEC line being used for preview, from the Distributor Ribbon select Browse>Remove SPEC. The previously selected SPEC is removed from the ribbon.

365 Distribution Manager Cache Address Book For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user to cache a local copy of a selected list to prevent long waits when loading the address book. lists may also be cached using the Profile Scheduler (see Address Book Cache). To Cache a Selected List: 1. Select the Cache Address Book option in the DM Settings function. 2. From the Lists drop down list, select the desired list to be cached and then click the Cache Address List button. The selected list is cached locally on the computer. Subsequently when the list is accessed, the system uses the cached list, reducing the load time. 3. Repeat step 2 to select and cached additional lists -or- to refresh a previously cached address book. Note: If a cached list was created while using the Outlook server option and then the server option was changed to SMTP, the Outlook cached list would still be available but could not be refreshed since the Outlook server option is no longer selected. Global Software, Inc.

366 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Local Address List For Excel 2010 (or above) users using server options Outlook or SMTP, Distribution Manager allows the user to create a customized local address list. This feature is beneficial when distributions are only for a select group of users or if the addresses are not available from any other list. Addresses on the local list may be added, edited and deleted as necessary. To Create and Maintain a Local Address List: 1. From the Lists drop down list, select Distributor (Local). 2. Key the appropriate name and address (Alias and City are optional fields) and then click the Add button. Repeat to add additional names to the list. If necessary, click the to remove the associated name from the list.

367 Distribution Manager DM View Log During the distribution process, various logging information is recorded. If the DM Settings option Enhanced Logging is selected, then the system records additional logging data. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. In Excel from the DM Ribbon, select Settings. The Distribution Manager Settings - General panel appears. 2. On the General panel, click View Log. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, action, status, description and workbook for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner. 3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then either click the Copy Selected Errors button -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. 4. To the entire error log to the help desk, click the Error Log button. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the error log attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. 5. To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the Workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. The system displays only entries for the selected workbook. Global Software, Inc.

368 360 Spreadsheet Server - Version To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify the desired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range. 7. To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The system displays only entries for the selected level(s). 8. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field and click the Find Next button. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Click the Find Next button again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 9. To clear the error log file, click the Clear Log button. 10. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panel appears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Properties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in the list. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click the Copy button. Click the Close button to return to the Log Viewer panel. 11. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click the Close button.

369 Spreadsheet Writeback 11 Spreadsheet Writeback 11.1 SWB Ribbon 361 After Spreadsheet Server is installed and initiated as an add-in to Excel, a custom Spreadsheet Server (SS) ribbon is added in Excel. Use the options in the Spreadsheet Writeback (SWB) group of the SS ribbon to access/process functions in the application. Menu Item Description Writeback Opens the SWB Execute Writeback panel, allowing the user to write data from the spreadsheet to the database (see Run Writebacks). If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appears first, allowing the user to select which method to process. Oracle APIs: Note: The following menu items only appear if the user has authority to writeback Oracle Public APIs. Build a Template Opens the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, allowing the user to select the package and procedure to be used to create a Builder sheet. The Builder sheet is used to select the parameters to be included in the writeback definition. Generate API Loader Sheet Opens the Use Loader Sheet panel, allowing the user to create a new or assign an existing Oracle API Loader sheet for the associated Builder sheet. The Loader sheet is used for entering the data to be written back to the database. Validate Click the down arrow to access functions for validating Oracle API writeback rows (i.e. validate all writeback rows in the workbook or worksheet, or only selected rows on the current worksheet). Global Software, Inc.

370 362 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Menu Item Description Generic Tables: Note: The following menu items only appear if the user has authority to writeback generic tables. Build a Template Opens the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel, allowing the user to create a writeback definition to write data from the spreadsheet to the database. Browse for Database Opens the Connection Builder panel, allowing the user to select the database to which the data will be written. Validate Click the down arrow to access functions for validating generic table writeback rows (i.e. validate all writeback rows in the workbook or worksheet, or only selected rows on the current worksheet).

371 Spreadsheet Writeback Oracle APIs Writeback Setup Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Data may be written back to an Oracle database via the Oracle public APIs. A user's ability to access the various writeback functions for Oracle public APIs is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Required Setup Functions for Oracle API Writebacks: Function Description Build a Template Allows the user to either select the Oracle API to be used to create a Builder sheet in the workbook (see Single API Method) -or- select a template to be used for creating both the Builder and Loader sheets in a single step (see Template Method). Builder Sheet Allows the user to select the API parameters to be included in the writeback definition. Loader Sheet Allows the user to enter the data to be written back to the database. When processing a writeback using an Oracle API, macros are used in the workbook thus the workbook must be save with a file type of.xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). As a result it is imperative to ensure that the Trust access to VBA project object model option is selected. To Set the Trust Access to VBA Project Object Model Option: 1. In Excel from the Excel Ribbon, select File>Options, the Excel Options panel appears. 2. On the Excel Options panel, select Trust Center and then click the Trust Center Settings button. The Trust Center panel appears. 3. On the Trust Center panel, select Macro Settings and then select the Trust access to the VBA project object model option. 4. Click OK. Global Software, Inc.

372 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Oracle APIs - Build a Template The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function provides two methods for the user to create Builder and/or Loader sheets in the workbook. Single API Method - allows the user to select the API to be used to create a Builder sheet. After the Builder sheet is created, the user then selects to create the Loader sheet. Template Method - allows the user to select a template to be used for creating both the Builder and Loader sheets in a single step. Note: Templates are created and maintained in the SS Settings. Multiple APIs may be assigned to a single template.

373 Spreadsheet Writeback Single API Method The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function allows the user to select the API to be used to create a Builder sheet. After the Builder sheet is created, the user then selects to create the Loader sheet. To Setup a Writeback using a Single API: 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Oracle APIs>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel appears. 2. Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be used to connect to the database. 3. Use the table to enter search criteria, and then click the Select API Packages button. The system loads a list of available API packages based upon the selection criteria specified. Field Description Package Name If desired, specify the API package name or selected characters, and toggle between Equals or Contains to define search parameters. Procedure Name If desired, specify the API procedure name or selected characters, and toggle between Equals or Contains to define search parameters. Show APIs for This Owner Only If selected, only APIs for the current user are listed in the results grid. Show Public APIs Only If selected, only public APIs are listed in the results grid. Show APIs with Validation Only If selected, only APIs with validation are listed in the results grid. Buttons Description Reset Clears the panel and resets it to the default state. Select API Packages Retrieves available API packages based upon the specified search criteria. Refresh Packages from Database Global Software, Inc. Re-reads the database schema and refreshes the list of available packages. This button is only available when using cached API lists, as determined by an option in the user's SS Settings.

374 366 Spreadsheet Server - Version From the list of Available Packages, select the desired package to be used. The system loads a list of available procedures for the selected API package. 5. From the list of Available Procedures, select the desired procedure to be used. The system loads a list of parameters for the selected API package and procedure.

375 Spreadsheet Writeback If applicable, select the desired Overloads alternate version of the Oracle API to be used to access different input and/or output parameters. 7. If desired, modify data in the Parameter List grid: To include a parameter in the API query, select the associated Included check box, otherwise deselect the option. By default all parameters are selected to be included. To assign a user-defined name to be displayed on the Builder Sheet and the Loader Sheet for the parameter, key the value in the associated Display Name field. To preset the Set As Default flag for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, select the associated Set As Default check box. To preset the API Field Default Value for a parameter on the Builder Sheet, key the value in the associated Data Value field To populate a cell in the grid with a value from a query, click the Lookup button, navigate to and select the desired query, select the desired value and click Insert Selected Value(s). The system returns the value from the first column to the selected cell. 8. If applicable, select the Omit API-level validation option to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected API during writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios in which field dependencies exist between related P_VALIDATE APIs being processed together. 9. After the appropriate data has been entered and verified, click one of the following toolbar icon or buttons. Insert (icon) -- creates a Builder worksheet and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Insert (button) -- creates a Builder worksheet and closes the panel. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel. 10. Save the workbook using a file type of.xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). 11. Proceed to the next step, Builder Sheet. Global Software, Inc.

376 368 Spreadsheet Server - Version Template Method The Oracle APIs - Build a Template function allows the user to select a template to be used for creating both the Builder and Loader sheets in the workbook in a single step. Templates must first be established in the user's SS Settings prior to using the Template method. Multiple APIs may be assigned to a single template. To Setup a Writeback using a Template: 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Oracle APIs>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel appears. 2. Click the down arrow and select the Oracle host configuration to be used to connect to the database. 3. Select the Template check box and then use the drop down box to select the template to be used for creating Builder and Loader sheets. When this option is selected the remaining fields on the panel will be disabled. 4. After the appropriate template has been selected, click one of the following toolbar icon or buttons. Insert (icon) -- creates the appropriate Builder and Loader worksheets and keeps the panel open for additional inserts. Insert (button) -- creates the appropriate Builder and Loader worksheets and closes the panel. Cancel (button) -- closes the panel. 5. Save the workbook using a file type of.xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). 6. To review data on the Build sheet, proceed to the next step, Builder Sheet; otherwise, proceed to the subsequent step, Loader Sheet to enter data on the Loader sheet.

377 Spreadsheet Writeback Builder Sheet The Builder sheet is used to select the API parameters to be included in the writeback definition. 1. After selecting the API and clicking Insert on the SWB Build a Template - Oracle Public API panel, a Builder sheet is created in the workbook. A table listing the API parameters appears on the Builder sheet, and range names for various items are created. Note: When the cursor is in the API Name cell, a tool tip displays the Oracle host configuration name. 2. If desired, modify API parameters: To include a parameter in the API query, select the associated Included check box, otherwise deselect the option. Select or deselect the included check box in the header to select or deselect the options for all parameters. Required parameters appears in red. Note: Required parameters must be included, or the Set As Default option must be selected and the Default Value specified for the parameter. To assign a user-defined name for a parameter, key the value in the Display Name field. To assign a default writeback value for a parameter, ensure the Set As Default option is selected and key the value to be assigned in the API Field Default Value field. The field may or may not be included in the API query. Select or deselect the Set As Default check box in the header to select or deselect the option for all parameters. To ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected API during writeback validation processing, select the Omit API-level validation option. 3. To generate a Loader sheet, click the Generate API Loader button -or- from the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs>Generate API Loader. The Use Loader Sheet panel appears. Accept the default Loader sheet, click the down arrow and select an existing Loader sheet, or enter a new sheet name (no special characters allowed), and then click OK. The system populates the new or existing Loader sheet. 4. Save the workbook using a file type of.xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). 5. Proceed to the next step, Loader Sheet. Global Software, Inc.

378 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Loader Sheet The Loader sheet is used to enter the data to be written back to the database. 1. After specifying the parameters to be included and the desired API field default values, and clicking Generate API Loader on the Builder sheet, a Loader sheet is created in the workbook. A table consisting of one data row appears on the Loader sheet, and range names which encompass the writeback definition are created. Note: Date and Status columns are to the far left or right of the grid based upon an option in the user's SS Settings When the cursor is in the API Name cell, a tool tip displays the range name of the associated writeback grid and the Oracle host configuration name. 2. To add data rows to the writeback definition range, click the Add API Loader Lines button. The Add API Loader Lines panel appears. Specify the number of lines to be added and click Insert. The system adds the specified number of lines to the writeback definition range. 3. On the SWBAPI> rows on the spreadsheet, key the necessary data to be written to the database. Note: All rows in the writeback definition range with the identifier "SWBAPI>" in the first column of the range are available for writing back. 4. If applicable, select the Omit API-level validation option to ignore the P_VALIDATE parameter for the selected API during writeback validation processing. This addresses scenarios in which field dependencies exist between related P_VALIDATE APIs being processed together.

379 Spreadsheet Writeback To filter data rows by status in the current loader or for all loaders on a sheet, click the Filter hyperlink in the appropriate Status column header. The Filter Data Rows on Loader panel appears. Click the down arrow and select the desired status for which to display data rows, select whether to filter data rows in the current loader or all loaders on the sheet, then click OK. The system filters the data rows accordingly. Note: The hidden rows are ignored for validation and writeback processing. 6. To remove the filter and display all data rows in the current loader or for all loaders on a sheet, click the Filter link in the appropriate Status column header. The Filter Data Rows on Loader panel appears. Select whether to clear the filter for data rows in the current loader or all loaders on the sheet, then click Clear Filter. The system displays all data rows accordingly. 7. Save the workbook using a file type of.xlsm (Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook). 8. Proceed to the next steps, Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows, Validate Writebacks or Run Writebacks. Global Software, Inc.

380 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Generic Tables Writeback Setup Spreadsheet Writeback provides an interface to enable data on worksheets to be written back to a database table. Data may be written back to any generic table for which the user has write permissions. A user's ability to access the various writeback functions for generic tables is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Required Setup Functions for Generic Table Writebacks: Function Description Browse for Database Allows the user to create connections and assign a specific database connection to each generic tables writeback definition. Backwards compatibility for legacy processing also allows for assigning a database connection to each worksheet in a workbook. Build a Template Allows the user to identify various criteria for the writeback definition, such as the database table and fields to which the data will be written back to, the range on the worksheet where the data to be written back resides and criteria for handling the database connection. Data Rows Allows the user to define the rows to be written back to the database and to enter the appropriate data. Additional Maintenance Functions for Generic Table Writebacks: Function Description Remove Writeback Database Connection Allows for removing the database connection assigned to a worksheet via Spreadsheet Writeback or via Excel (only applies to legacy processing). Delete Writeback Definition Allows for deleting a generic tables writeback definition from a worksheet via Spreadsheet Writeback or via Excel.

381 Spreadsheet Writeback Browse for Database The Browse for Database function allows the user to create connections and assign a specific database connection to each generic tables writeback definition. Backwards compatibility for legacy processing also allows for assigning a database connection to each worksheet in a workbook. Database connections may be created to the following data sources: Application Configurator Connections or Host Configurations (excluding Salesforce and SAP connection types) DSN Oracle SQL Server IBM DB2 -- iseries Access (ODBC or OLE/DB) 1. To set the database connection for a: New writeback definition or worksheet -- place the cursor in any cell on the worksheet. Continue with step 2. Existing writeback definition -- place the cursor in the Schema/Table Name cell of the writeback definition. Continue with step In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Browse for Database. The Connection Builder panel appears. 2. Select the desired Connection Type, and then click Next -or- select the Connection Settings tab. The Connection Settings panel appears displaying the appropriate setting fields based upon the selected connection type. 3. Use the table to enter data on the Connection Settings panel. Field Description Application Configurator Connections: Database Connection Name Global Software, Inc. Click the down arrow and select the Configurator connection or host configuration to be used.

382 374 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Login: Name/Password Displays the login name and password assigned to the connection or host configuration in the Configurator. Note: When using a Configurator connection, the system utilizes the Prompt for Input option as defined in the Configurator. Connection Displays the criteria defined for the connection or host configuration in the Configurator. DSN: Database Driver Click the down arrow and select a driver. Valid options are Access dbase, Access Driver, or Excel. Data Source Name (DSN) Click the down arrow and select the data source (DSN). Connect using Windows Authentication If selected, indicates to use the user's Windows login ID to validate security access to the designated server. ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database. Password Specify the password associated with the above user name. Oracle: Server Name Specify the Oracle Local Server Name. SID Specify the service name indicating where the database is located. Port Specify the port number. ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database. Password Specify the password associated with the above user name. SQL Server: Server Name Click the down arrow and select the server name. Connect using Windows Authentication If selected, indicates to use the user's Windows login ID to validate security access to the designated server. ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database. Password Specify the password associated with the above user name. Database Name Click the down arrow and select the database. iseries (ODBC / OLE/DB): 4. System Specify the server name or IP address. ID Specify the user name to be used to connect to the database library. Password Specify the password associated with the above user name. Default Library Specify the name of the database library. To modify the Connection Save Options setting, select the appropriate radio button. Field Description Save (without password) Saves the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet without saving the password. A login prompt panel appears when accessing the Build a Template or Writeback functions for generic tables. This option is only available for connections that have a login ID.

383 Spreadsheet Writeback 375 Field Description Save Saves the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet with all login information. Caution should be used when utilizing this option, as anyone obtaining the workbook will be able to writeback to the database. Don't Save Does not save the connection in the writeback definition or worksheet, but instead a prompt for connection appears when accessing the Build a Template or Writeback functions for generic tables. 6. To test the connection, click Test Connection. If required the user is prompted to enter login information. The system returns a message confirming that the connection is successful. 7. To update the connection and assign the database to the writeback definition or worksheet, click OK. 8. Proceed to the next step, Generic Tables - Build a Template. Global Software, Inc.

384 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Generic Tables - Build a Template The Generic Tables - Build a Template functions allows the user to identify various criteria for the writeback definition, such as the database table and fields to which the data will be written back to, the range on the worksheet where the data to be written back resides and criteria for handling the database connection. 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template. If creating the first writeback definition on a worksheet or no connection is assigned to the worksheet -- a message appears indicating that a database connection is not set. Click Yes to browse for a connection (see Browse for Database for instructions). Once the database connection is set, the SWB Build a Template Generic Tables panel appears. If creating a subsequent writeback definition on a worksheet or a connection is assigned to the worksheet -- a message appears asking whether to use the active connection or to browse for a new connection. Response accordingly. Once the database connection is set, the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel. Field Description Schema Name Click the down arrow and select the database schema or table space name. Note: For some connection types the Schema Name will remain blank. Table Name Click the down arrow and select the table to which the data will be written.

385 Spreadsheet Writeback 377 Field Description Table Fields: Included / Name Once the Schema Name and Table Name are defined, the associated fields are listed. Select the fields to which data will be written. Primary key fields are required and are automatically selected. If the table does not have a primary key then one should be added -or- once the template has been inserted into the spreadsheet then key fields may be defined by prefixing the field name with two asterisks. Example: **FiscalYear Required fields may also be predefined by prefixing a field with one asterisk. Example: *Account Note: During the writeback process the system validates that all required fields are nonblank. Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields. Worksheet Insert: Range Name Once the Schema Name and Table Name are defined, a systemgenerated range name defaults. The range name for the writeback determines the valid rows and columns on the worksheet that may be written back. It is recommended to use the system-generated name; however if necessary, click the down arrow and select an existing range name. Note: The system generated range name syntax is GSIWB.ABC, where ABC is the selected table name. Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the sheet for the writeback definition. Starting Column Specify the starting column for the writeback definition range. Starting Row Specify the starting row for the writeback definition range. Ending Column (Optional) Specify the ending column for the writeback definition range. A value must be entered when using the Exclude Column Names option. If this value is not defined then the system determines the range width. Ending Row (Optional) Specify the ending row for the writeback definition range. If this value is not defined then the range defaults to three rows: a column header row, one data row, plus one empty row. Worksheet Database Connection: Save (Without Password) Global Software, Inc. If selected, the connection in the worksheet is saved without saving the password, thus a login prompt panel appears when accessing the Build a Template or Writeback functions. This option is only available for connections that have a login ID.

386 378 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field 3. Description Save If selected, the connection in the worksheet is saved with all login data. Note: Caution should be used when utilizing this option, as anyone obtaining the work book will be able to writeback to the database. Don't Save If selected, the connection in the worksheet is not saved, but instead a prompt for connection appears when accessing the Build a Template or Writeback functions. Exclude Column Names When column headers have been predefined on the spreadsheet, select this option for the system to not assign column names when creating the writeback definition range. When this option is selected, an Ending Column value must be assigned. Buttons Description Delete a Writeback Definition Displays the Delete Writeback Definition panel allowing the user to remove a writeback definition (see Delete Writeback Definitions). To load the writeback definition to the worksheet, click Insert. The writeback definition is loaded to the worksheet with columns for the table fields selected plus two columns to hold the date and status of the last writeback. Note: The Date and Status columns are added to the far left or right of the grid based upon an option in the user's SS Settings. When a writeback definition is inserted, a range name for the writeback is created -or- a prompt to overwrite the name appears if the range name already exists. The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100, where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback definition on the work sheet (i.e. GSIWB , GSIWB ), thus allowing for up to 999 writeback definitions per work sheet. In addition, a special range name is created that identifies the writeback definition and the range name for the writeback. When the cursor is in the Schema/Table Name cell, a tool tip displays the writeback range name and the database connection. 4. Save the workbook. 5. Proceed to the next step, Generic Tables - Data Rows.

387 Spreadsheet Writeback Generic Tables - Data Rows After the writeback definition for generic tables has been defined, it is necessary to define the rows to be written back to the database and to enter the appropriate data. 1. After entering the appropriate writeback definition criteria and clicking Insert on the SWB Build a Template Generic Tables panel, a table consisting of one data row appears on the worksheet, and the system creates range names which encompass the writeback definition. 2. To add additional data rows to the writeback definition range, use one of the following methods: Copy/Insert -- copy an existing SWB> row in the range and insert the copied row in the existing range. Expand Range -- from the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. Use the Name Manager panel to select and expand the size of the writeback definition range. Note: Refer to Excel Help for additional instructions on expanding the size of a range. The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100, where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback definition (i.e. GSIWB , GSIWB ). 3. On the SWB> rows on the spreadsheet, key the necessary data to be written to the database. Note: All rows in the writeback definition range with the identifier "SWB>" in the first column of the range are available for writing back. The writeback identifier may be excluded from rows in the writeback definition range to allow for non-writeback rows such as summary rows, group headers and footers. 4. Save the workbook. 5. Proceed to the next steps, Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows, Validate Writebacks or Run Writebacks. Global Software, Inc.

388 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Generic Tables - Writeback Definition Example After inserting the writeback definition the generic table name and field names will be displayed on the worksheet in Excel. The Build a Template function for generic tables also creates a range name that encompasses the writeback definition columns and the data rows to be written back. The example below shows a writeback definition which has been inserted onto a spreadsheet using the Build a Template function for generic tables, and where data has been keyed and written back to the appropriate table. The writeback definition on the spreadsheet includes: Schema Name and Table Name inserted and displayed in cell A1. The syntax is schema_name.table_name. Selected writeback fields are the next sequence of cells (B1:H1). Date and Time of the data row's writeback is entered at the time writeback is executed (G1). Status of the data row's writeback is entered at the time writeback is executed (H1). All rows in the writeback's range name with the identifier "SWB>" in the first column of the range (A2:A3) are available for writing back. The writeback identifier can be excluded from rows in the writeback's range name to allow for non writeback rows such as summary rows, group headers and footers.

389 Spreadsheet Writeback Generic Tables - Remove Writeback Database Connection In legacy writeback processing, database connections are maintained at the worksheet level of a workbook. A worksheet level writeback database connection may be removed via Spreadsheet Writeback or via Excel. To Remove a Workbook Level Writeback Database Connection via Spreadsheet Writeback 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel appears. 2. Select Don't Save for the Worksheet Database Connection option and click Insert. The panel closes and the connection is removed from the worksheet. 3. Save the workbook. To Remove a Workbook Level Writeback Database Connection via Excel 1. From the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. The Name Manager panel appears. Note: The connection range name syntax is GSIWB.000.###, where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback definition (i.e. GSIWB , GSIWB ). Global Software, Inc.

390 382 Spreadsheet Server - Version From the list of names, select the connection range name(s) to be deleted and click Delete. The connection is removed. 3. Save the workbook.

391 Spreadsheet Writeback Generic Tables - Delete Writeback Definition If necessary generic tables writeback definitions may be deleted from a worksheet. The definition may be removed via Spreadsheet Writeback or via Excel. To Delete a Writeback Definition via Spreadsheet Writeback 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Generic Tables>Build a Template. The SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel appears. 2. On the SWB Build a Template - Generic Tables panel, click Delete a Writeback Definition. The Delete Writeback Definition panel appears. 3. For each writeback definition targeted for deletion, select the check box in the Delete column and click OK. A message appears indicating that the deletion is complete. Note: An option is also available for deleting the writeback definition range name if desired. 4. Save the workbook. To Delete a Writeback Definition via Excel 1. From the Excel Ribbon select Formula>Name Manager. The Name Manager panel appears. Note: The writeback definition range name syntax is GSIWB.###.100, where ### represents an incremented number for each writeback definition (i.e. GSIWB , GSIWB ). 2. From the list of names, select the writeback definition(s) to be deleted and click Delete. The writeback definition is removed. 3. Save the workbook. Global Software, Inc.

392 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Writeback Processing Once the writeback definition has been defined and data has been entered on the spreadsheet, whether it is for an Oracle API or a generic table, use the Write Back function to select the writeback definitions and associated data rows to be previewed, validated and/or run. Feature Description Preview Allows for previewing the data rows for a single writeback. Once data rows for the single writeback are previewed, then individually selected data rows may be validated and then written to the database. Validate Verifies the data prior to writing it back to the database. Various methods and options are available for validating the writeback data. Although it is not mandatory to validate prior to writing back the data, it is highly recommended to do so. Run Writes the data that was defined by the writeback definition to the database. When running writebacks, the user may run an individual writeback, all writebacks for a selected worksheet, or all writebacks for the entire workbook. In addition to inserting a new record or updating an existing record, Spreadsheet Writeback provides the ability to delete data for a generic table from a database. This may only be done when processing a single writeback and only on a row by row basis (see Generic Tables - Delete Data).

393 Spreadsheet Writeback Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows Spreadsheet Writeback allows for previewing the data rows for a single writeback, whether it is for an Oracle API or a generic table. Once data rows for the single writeback are previewed, then individually selected data rows may be validated and then written to the database. To Preview Writeback and Process Selected Rows: 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back. The appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or Generic) panel appears. Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appears first, allowing the user to select which method to process. 2. On the SWB Execute Writeback panel, select Preview Rows. The system displays the writeback data rows for the selected worksheet/writeback. Note: If an individual work sheet/writeback is not selected, the system automatically selects the first writeback on the current work sheet when the Preview Rows option is selected. 3. Deselect or select the rows for processing. Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields. 4. If desired, select the option, Stop On First Error, indicating for the system to stop the validation or writeback process when the first error is encountered. Global Software, Inc.

394 386 Spreadsheet Server - Version After selections are made, click one of the following buttons: Highlight Writeback Data (Toggle) -- toggles to highlight or remove the highlight on the spreadsheet the writeback rows currently selected in the grid. Validate Rows -- validates the data for the selected rows (see Validate Writebacks). 6. After the validation process is complete, to writeback data for the selected rows, click Run Writeback. The system writes the data back to the database (see Run Writebacks).

395 Spreadsheet Writeback Validate Writebacks Whether it is for an Oracle API or a generic table, Spreadsheet Writeback provides various methods and options for validating data prior to writing it back to the database. Although it is not mandatory to validate prior to writing back the data, it is highly recommended to do so. To Validate Writeback Row(s) via the SWB Ribbon: 1. Open the workbook to the desired Loader or data sheet, then: To validate selected row(s) -- select the desired SWBAPI> or SWB> row(s), then on the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs or Generic Tables>Validate>Validate Selected Row(s). To validate all rows on the worksheet -- on the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs or Generic Tables>Validate>Validate All Rows in the Worksheet. To validate all rows in the workbook -- on the SWB Ribbon select Oracle APIs or Generic Tables>Validate>Validate All Rows in the Workbook. A message appears with the results, and the Date and Status columns on the writeback data rows are updated accordingly. To Validate Writeback Row(s) via the Write Back function: 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back. The appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or Generic) panel appears. Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appears first, allowing the user to select which method to process. 2. On the SWB Execute Writeback panel: To validate selected row(s) -- select Preview Rows and then deselect or select the rows to be validated. Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields. To validate all rows on the worksheet -- set Select Worksheet equal to the desired Loader sheet. To validate all rows on the worksheet for a specific writeback -- set Select Worksheet equal to the desired Loader sheet and set Select Writeback to the desired writeback. To validate all rows in the workbook -- set Select Worksheet equal to [All Worksheets]. 3. After selections are made, click Validate Rows -or- click the Question Mark icon ( ) to validate a single row. The system displays a message with results and updates the Date and Status columns on the writeback data row(s) accordingly. If validation is run while in Preview Rows mode: The system also determines if the row is an insert (new record) or update (modification of an existing record), and indicates whether each row validated normally or not. Green check -- row validated normally. Red exclamation point -- an error occurred in validation. Click the icon or View Log to determine the problem. Global Software, Inc.

396 388 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 For generic tables only, after validation is run in Preview Rows mode: Primary key fields are wrapped with two asterisks (**) and required, non-primary key fields are wrapped with one asterisk (*). After a row has been validated and flagged as Update, it is possible to compare the existing value with the new value. Hover the mouse over a cell in the SWB Execute Writeback panel to display the current value in the database.

397 Spreadsheet Writeback Run Writebacks Once the writeback definition has been defined and data has been entered on the spreadsheet, whether it is for an Oracle API or a generic table, use the Write Back function to select the writeback definitions and associated data rows to be run. Running a writeback writes the data that was defined by the writeback definition to the database. When running writebacks, the user may run an individual writeback, all writebacks for a selected worksheet, or all writebacks for the entire workbook. See Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows for instructions on writing back for selected data rows for a single writeback definition. A user's ability to truncate (clear) tables prior to writeback is determined by an option in User settings in the Configurator. 1. In Excel from the SWB Ribbon, select Write Back. The appropriate SWB Execute Writeback (Oracle API or Generic) panel appears. Note: If the user has authority to writeback to more than one method, the Select Writeback Method panel appears first, allowing the user to select which method to process. 2. Use the table to enter data on the SWB Execute Writeback panel to indicate how to writeback data. Field Description General Options: Include All Rows Specify when writing back data whether to writeback all rows, only insert rows, or only update rows in the writeback definition. For Oracle APIs, include all rows is the only option available. Preview Rows If selected, writeback rows for the selected worksheet/writeback are displayed in the grid for preview, validation and writeback purposes (see Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows). Writeback Selection: Select Worksheet Click the down arrow and select the individual worksheet containing the writeback definition(s) to be processed -or- select all worksheets. For generic tables, when all worksheets is selected, the user is allowed to override the connection previously set for each worksheet. Select Writeback Global Software, Inc. Click the down arrow and select the individual writeback definition to be run -or- select all writebacks in the workbook or for the active worksheet.

398 390 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Truncate (Clear) Tables Before If selected, indicates to clear all data in the table(s) prior to processing Writeback the writeback(s). This option only appears when writing back to generic tables, and only applies when using an Oracle or SQL Server connection. Rows: When the Preview Rows option is selected, displays the data rows for the selected worksheet/writeback. Select the rows to be processed. Nav Tip: Click the top left corner in the Table Fields section to select or deselect all fields. Stop on First Error When the Preview Rows option is selected, select this option to indicate for the system to stop the validation or writeback process when the first error is encountered. Button Description Highlight Writeback Data (Toggle) When the Preview Rows option is selected, toggles to highlight or remove the highlight for spreadsheet rows currently selected for writeback. Validate Rows Validates data for the selected rows or selected writeback(s) (see Validate Writebacks). Run Writeback Writes data back to the database for the selected rows or selected writeback(s). View Log Opens the Log Viewer panel, where the user may view, filter or copy log entries, or clear the log file (see SWB View Log). 4. To preview writeback data and to validate or writeback by selected data row, proceed to Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows. 5. To validate writeback data, proceed to Validate Writebacks. 6. To writeback data, make the appropriate selections and click Run Writeback. The system starts the writeback process. Note: For generic tables only, if multiple work sheets were selected, the Run Writeback panel appears allowing the user to override the database previously assigned. Click No to use the original database set for each writeback definition or work sheet. Click Yes to select a database to be applied to all writeback s being run.

399 Spreadsheet Writeback 7. When the writeback process is complete, the system displays a message with results, indicates in the grid whether or not all rows processed normally, and updates the Date and Status columns on the writeback data row (s) accordingly. If writeback is run while in Preview Rows mode: Green check -- row inserted or updated successfully. Red exclamation point -- an error occurred. Click the icon or View Log to determine the problem. Writeback results while in Preview Rows mode Writeback results while NOT in Preview Rows mode After all writebacks are run, click Close. Global Software, Inc.

400 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Generic Tables - Delete Data In addition to inserting a new record or updating an existing record, Spreadsheet Writeback provides the ability to delete data for a generic table from a database. This may only be done when processing a single writeback and only on a row by row basis for Update data type rows. 1. Complete steps 1-5 for running a single writeback (see Preview Writebacks and Process Selected Rows). These steps include: Accessing the function Selecting an individual worksheet and writeback, and selecting desired rows for processing Validating rows 2. With the SWB Execute Writeback - Generic panel open and the Validate Rows function complete, right click in the Insert/Update field on the data row targeted for deletion. The Database Delete Record dialog box appears. 3. Click Yes to delete the selected data or click No to cancel the delete process. 4. Click the Question Mark icon ( ) to process a single row. After running the writeback on the row the Insert/ Update is changed to Insert for the deleted record 5. After all writebacks are run, click Close.

401 Spreadsheet Writeback 11.5 Miscellaneous Items SWB View Log 393 During the writeback process, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed or copied. 1. To access the SWB Log, click View Log from one of the panels listed below. The Log Viewer panel appears displaying the level, date, time, action, description, writeback definition name, worksheet, and workbook for each log entry. In addition, in the bottom right hand corner the panel displays a count of the number of entries listed. Spreadsheet Server Settings - Writeback panel SWB Execute Writeback panel Note: To select a different size font, click on the drop down arrow in the bottom right hand corner. 2. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log Viewer panel first select the desired record(s) and then either click Copy Selected Errors -or- right click on the list and select Copy Selected Errors on the popup panel: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. 3. To filter log entries for a specific workbook, click the workbook down arrow and select the desired workbook. The system displays only entries for the selected workbook. 4. To filter for a specific date range of entries in the error log file, select the Filter on Date check box and specify the desired date range. The system displays only entries for the selected date range. Global Software, Inc.

402 394 Spreadsheet Server - Version To filter for a specific level of entries in the error log file, select the desired level(s) in the Filter list. The system displays only entries for the selected level(s). 6. To search for a specific value in the error log file Action column, key the desired value in the Find What field and click Find Next. The system will highlight the first log entry containing the value. Click Find Next again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 7. To clear the error log file, click Clear Log. 8. To display the full details of a log entry, double click the selected entry in the list. The Error Properties panel appears. Use the arrow buttons on the Error Proprieties panel to scroll up or down through the log entries in the list. To copy detail data for a single log entry to the clipboard, click Copy. Click Close to return to the Log Viewer panel. 9. To exit the Log Viewer panel, click Close.

403 Profile Scheduler Profile Scheduler The Profile Scheduler component in Spreadsheet Server allows for scheduling various jobs such as caching the Distribution Manager address book, refreshing workbooks, distributing Distribution Manager workbooks, and loading custom tables or local database files. A user's ability to access the Profile Scheduler, to access the Database Management tab within Profile Scheduler, and to create, edit, delete and/or run a job is determined by parameter settings defined in User settings in the Configurator. Note: As Profile Scheduler work s with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running jobs various user right assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview). To Access the Profile Scheduler: 1. From the desktop, click Start>Programs>Global Software Spreadsheet Server>Profile Scheduler. The Profile Scheduler panel appears. Note: When not using Windows Single Signon, the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server. Global Software, Inc.

404 396 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To Create a New Job: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab. 2. To add a new job, from the ribbon select New. The Select Profile Type panel appears. 3. Click the down arrow and select the desired profile type for which to create a new job, and then click OK. The appropriate New Job panel appears. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. Use the following links to access specific profile type information: Address Book Cache Distribution Manager Custom Table Loads Load Local INF Load Local JDE To Maintain an Existing Job: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab. 2. To modify an existing job, double click the desired job from the list -or- select the desired job from the list and then from the ribbon select Edit. The appropriate job panel appears. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. To Run One or More Jobs: 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Jobs tab. 2. To run one or more jobs, select the Run check box for the desired jobs from the list, if desired select the Halt On Error option indicating to stop all processing when an error occurs, and then from the ribbon select Run. The system processes the jobs and updates the Start, Finish and Status fields accordingly. Note: When the associated host configuration for a Load Local INF or Load Local JDE job uses <Sign-On>, the user is first prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. When running a Distribution Manager job if the user or connection is not set to auto-signon, then the user is first prompted to sign on to Spreadsheet Server.

405 Profile Scheduler Address Book Cache The Address Book Cache profile type is used to cache the address book lists used in Distribution Manager in order to reduce the time required to load the address book. To Create/Maintain an Address Book Cache Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Address Book Cache - Job tab. Field Description Job Name Specify the name of the job. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job. General Information: 2. Cache Global Address List / Cache Outlook Contacts Specify whether caching the Global Address List or Outlook Contacts. Note: The Outlook option is only available if Global's Outlook Add-In component has been loaded for Excel 2010 (or above) users. Address Book Cache Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired location for the Address Book Cache folder. Button Function Clear Cache Removes all cached files in the specified Address Book Cache folder. Address Book Opens the address book used in Distribution Manager. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job. Global Software, Inc.

406 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Distribution Manager The Distribution Manager profile type is used to refresh selected workbooks with specified replacement values and/or to schedule the distribution of selected Distribution Manager workbooks. Note: Scheduling Distribution Manager with Profile Scheduler and Office 365 is currently NOT supported. To Create/Maintain a Distribution Manager Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Job tab. Field Description Job Name Specify the name of the job. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job. Select the Workbooks to Process: This section indicates the workbooks and/or folder of workbooks to be included in the run. To add workbooks to the job, specify the default values, click the Add Workbook(s) button, navigate to and select the desired workbook(s), and then click the Open button. To add a folder of workbooks to the job, specify the default values, click the Add Folder button, navigate to and select the desired folder, and then click the Open button. To remove a workbook or folder, select the item in the window, and click the Remove button. To control the order of worksheets or folders in the list, select the item in the window, and click the appropriate arrow button to move the item up or down in the list.

407 Profile Scheduler Field 399 Description Run If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are processed when the job is run. Workbook Name Displays the name of the workbook or folder assigned to the job. Start Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run prior to refreshing and/ or distributing the workbook(s). Refresh If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are refreshed using the replacement data on the Range Name Replacement tab during the run process (prior to distribution). Distribution If selected, the workbook and/or workbooks in the folder are distributed during the run process. End Macro If desired, specify the name of the macro to be run after refreshing and/or distributing the workbook(s). Run Default Specify the default Run value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job. Refresh Default Specify the default Refresh value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job. Distribution Default Specify the default Distribution value to be assigned when a workbook and/ or folder is added to the job. Start Macro Default Specify the default Start Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/or folder is added to the job. End Macro Default Specify the default End Macro value to be assigned when a workbook and/ or folder is added to the job. Halt on Error If selected, when running the profile if an error is encountered the system stops processing the job. Otherwise, the system continues processing the next item in the job list. Button Function Run Saves and closes the job, and then processes all workbooks and/or workbooks in the folders which are selected to run. Global Software, Inc.

408 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Distribution Manager - Range Name Replacement tab. Field Description Range Name Replacement: This section indicates the ranges in the selected workbooks to be replaced with designated values. To display a list of range names in the workbooks assigned to the job, click the Refresh button. To modify values, select the line in the window and make the appropriate change(s). To remove a range from the list, select the item in the window, and click the Remove button. To clear all ranges from the list, click the Clear button. Range Name Specify the name of the range to be replaced. Replacement Value Specify the value to be placed in the associated range. Button Function Run Saves and closes the job, and then processes all workbooks and/or workbooks in the folders which are selected to run. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job.

409 Profile Scheduler Custom Table Loads The Custom Table Loads profile type is used to download tables and table data from a source database into a target database, allowing for optimized calculation speeds. The order in which records are processed in update mode is based upon options in the user's PS Settings. Contact Global for additional information on Custom Table Loads. To Create/Maintain a Custom Table Load Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads - Job tab. Field Description Job Name Specify the name of the job. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job. General Information: Source Database Click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the source database containing the original tables. The list only displays Access, iseries, Oracle or SQL Server connections, or SAP (NetCo 3.0) host configurations to which the user is authorized. Target Database Click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the target database. The list only displays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load local connections and to which the user is authorized. Replace Data If selected, the system deletes records for the selected table(s) prior to downloading data. If not selected, the download process only adds new and/or updates existing records for the selected table(s). Global Software, Inc.

410 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 The Tables to Transfer panel does not initially list any tables. Click the Search for Tables button. The Tables panel appears. On the Tables panel, enter selection criteria in the Schema/Library and Search For fields as appropriate and click Search. The system lists tables matching the search criteria. From the list select the desired table(s) and click Add. The system returns the select table(s) to the Tables to Transfer tab. Click Close to close the panel.

411 Profile Scheduler Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads - Tables to Transfer tab. Field Description Include If selected, indicates to include the table in the load process. Source Name Displays schema (if available) and name of the selected source table. Target Table Name Specify the target table name. The name defaults to the source table name. A sequence number is appended when duplicate names exists. Included Columns When a table is included, the system defaults to include all columns. If necessary, click in the cell and on the Define Table Structure panel (see below) select the column(s) to be included when building/inserting data to the target table and then click OK. The system returns the selected column(s) to be included in the target table. Note: Cannot exclude a column which is part of the primary k ey. Primary Key When a table is included, the system when possible defaults the primary key for the table. If necessary, click in the cell and on the Define Table Structure panel (see below) select the desired column(s) to be part of the primary key. When data does not fit with a concept of uniqueness, select the Assign Unique Identifier check box instead, which allows the system to define a unique field to be used for the table. When the appropriate data is selected, click OK. The system returns the selected column(s) to be used as the primary key or returns the literal *Create Unique Identifier. Indexed Columns If necessary, click in the cell and on the Define Table Structure panel (see below) select the desired column(s) to make up the indexed columns key for the table and then click OK. The system returns the selected column (s) to be used for indexing. Global Software, Inc.

412 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Button Description Criteria If necessary, click in the cell and on the Build Select Query panel enter the selection criteria for creating a small subset of data to be uploaded. Search for Tables Opens the Tables panel, allowing the user to search for and return selected tables to the Tables to Transfer panel. Use the table to enter data on the Define Table Structure panel. Field Description Assign Unique Identifier If selected, the system creates a unique field in the target table to be used as the primary key. Include If selected, indicates to include the source column in the target table. Source Column Name Displays the name of the column in the source table. Target Column Name Specify the target column name. Defaults to the source table name. Data Type Click the down arrow and select the data type for the target column. Valid values are Text, Numeric, Currency, Date/Time, Boolean, Memo and Decimal. Size Specify the size for the target column. Decimal Specify the decimal positions for the target column. Primary Key If selected, indicates to use the column as part of the primary key. Note: When data does not fit with a concept of uniqueness, select the Assign Unique Identifier check box instead, which allows the system to define a unique field to be used for the table. Indexed Columns If selected, indicates to use the column for indexing. Incremental Update Control Column If desired, click the down arrow and select the column to be used for comparison purposes when processing incremental updating. Last Incremental Value If desired, specify the last value processed for the control column. When the job is run in update mode (i.e. Replace Data option is not selected), the system processes only records which exceed the last incremental value and then updates the last incremental value accordingly.

413 Profile Scheduler Refer to the Custom Views section for instructions on creating and maintaining user-defined views for defining a subset of data to be uploaded. 6. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job. Global Software, Inc.

414 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Build Select Query The Build Select Query feature is used to define a smaller subset of data for uploading. 1. From the Custom Table Loads - Tables to Transfer tab, click in the Criteria field for the desired table. The Build Select Query panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the Build Select Query panel. Field Description Column Name Click the down arrow and select the column on which to base the criteria definition. Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator. Valid values are = (equal), <> (not equal), > (greater than), >= (greater then and equal to), < (less than), <= (less than and equal to), Like, Between, or In. Data Values (no label) Click the down arrow and select the value to apply to the operator -ormanually enter the value if it is not in the drop down list. Criteria Results (no label) Displays the selection criteria definition. Manually modify the criteria as necessary. 3. When all criteria fields are entered, select one of the following options: Add into Criteria - adds the criteria. Or into Criteria - adds the criteria as an 'OR' statement. And into Criteria - adds the criteria as an 'AND' statement. 4. Repeat the process until all criteria is specified. 5. To save all changes and close the panel, click OK.

415 Profile Scheduler Custom Views The Custom Views feature is used to create and maintain user-defined views for defining a subset of data to be uploaded. If desired, when creating a custom view, a saved query (.edq) may be used. Note: When creating a Custom View for a SAP source database, a saved query (.edq) must be used. To Add a New Custom View -- Without Using a Saved Query: 1. From the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab, click New. The Custom View Management panel appears. 2. Specify a unique name for the custom view and click OK. The Query Build panel appears. Global Software, Inc.

416 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Tables tab. Field Description Available Tables Displays a list of tables available for selection. To add a table to the query, select the table in the window and click the insert button ( ) -or- double click the table. Repeat the process as necessary. Tables in This Query Displays a list of tables selected to be used in the query. To remove a single table from the query, select the table in the window and click the remove button ( ) -or- double click the table. To remove all tables from the query, click the remove all button ( ). Button Description Options Displays the Table Options panel, allowing the user to select whether to use literals on all table and column names, to display tables and/or views, and to include schema in the Available Tables list. Refresh Refreshes the list of available tables.

417 Profile Scheduler Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Joins tab. Note: The Joins tab is only available when multiple tables are selected on the Tables tab. Button Description Left Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to base the join definition. Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator to be applied. Right Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to base the join definition. Join Includes Specify the appropriate join type. By default an inner join is selected, which includes only records where the joined fields from both tables are the same. Additional options are available to join all records from the left table and only records in the right table where the joined fields match, or to join all records from the right table and only records in the left table where the joined fields match. Joins in Query Displays join definitions. Button Description Add Adds the join definition to the Joins in Query window. Edit Opens the Edit Join panel for the selected join, allowing the user to maintain the join definition. Remove Removes the selected join from the Joins in Query window. Global Software, Inc.

418 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Columns tab. Field Description Available Tables and Columns Displays a list of tables and columns available for selection. To add a table or column to the query, select the table or column in the window and click the insert button ( ) -or- double click the table or column. Repeat the process as necessary. Note: Do not select image type columns, as Custom Views do not support the transfer of this type of data. Columns in This Query Displays a list of columns selected to be used in the query. To remove a single column from the query, select the column in the window and click the remove button ( ) -or- double click the column. To remove all columns from the query, click the remove all button ( ). Use Group By If selected, an additional parameter appears in the Columns in This Query window, allowing the user to specify group by / totaling criteria for each column. Button Description Add Custom Opens the Add Custom Column panel, allowing the user to assign a custom column to the query. Edit Column Opens the Add Custom Column panel for the selected custom column, allowing the user to maintain the criteria for the custom column.

419 Profile Scheduler Use the table to enter data on the Query Builder - Criteria tab. Field Description Field/Express Click the down arrow and select the field or expression on which to base the criteria definition. Operator Click the down arrow and select the operator to be applied. Value Click the down arrow and select the value type, then click the down arrow and select the value to apply to the operator. Criteria in Query Displays the selection criteria definition. Button Description Add Criteria: And / Or Adds the criteria using either an 'AND' or 'OR' statement. Edit Opens the Edit Criteria panel for the selected criteria entry, allowing the user to maintain the criteria. Remove Removes the selected criteria entry from the Criteria in Query window. 7. When all criteria fields are entered, select one of the following Add Criteria options: And - adds the criteria as an 'AND' statement. Or - adds the criteria as an 'OR' statement. 8. Repeat the process until all criteria is specified. 9. When all Custom View criteria is entered, select one of the following options: Preview Now - displays the data selected based upon the custom view. View SQL - displays the custom view SQL statement. Note: If desired, click View SQL and manually paste the query SQL text on the Query Builder panel. OK - updates the custom view, closes the panel and returns to the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab. Cancel - aborts the process, closes the panel and returns to the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab. Global Software, Inc.

420 412 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To Add a New Custom View -- Using a Saved Query: Note: Prior to using this feature, ensure that the desired query has been created and saved via Query Designer. Fields not flagged as visible in the query will not be included as columns in the custom view. 1. From the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab, click New. The Custom View Management panel appears. 2. Specify a unique name for the custom view, select the Use Saved Query (.edq) check box and click OK. The Open panel appears. 3. Select the desired saved query (.edq) to be used for the custom view and click Open. If parameters exist for the selected query, then the Change Parameters panel appears, otherwise the Define Table Structure panel appears. 4. If necessary, change the query parameter value(s) to be used for the custom view and click OK. The Define Table Structure panel appears.

421 Profile Scheduler Define the various criteria for columns in the table to be used for the custom view (i.e. target column name, data type, size, decimal, primary key, indexes) and click OK. The custom view is added to the grid on the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab. Note: See Define Table Structure for more information. When using a saved query (.edq) to create a custom view, the Include option is disabled on the Define Table Structure panel and the incremental updating feature does not apply. Global Software, Inc.

422 414 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 To Maintain Existing Custom Views: 1. Access the Custom Table Loads - Custom Views tab. A list of existing custom views appears in the Build Views grid. 2. To include or exclude a custom view in the load process, select or deselect the Include option for the custom view accordingly. 3. To modify the query for a custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Edit -or- click in the Query field for the desired view. If the view is NOT based upon a saved query, then the Query Build panel appears. Make the necessary modifications and click OK. If the view is based upon a saved query, then the Open panel appears. Select the desired query and click Open, then modify the query parameter values as necessary and click OK. 4. To modify the various criteria for target table columns, click in the Primary Key or Indexed Column field for the desired view. The Defined Table Structure panel appears. Change the necessary data (i.e. target column name, data type, size, decimal, primary key, indexes, incremental values) and then click OK. Note: See Define Table Structure for more information. The Include option is disabled on the Define Table Structure panel for custom views, and the incremental updating feature does not apply when using a saved query (.edq) to create a custom view. 5. To modify query parameter values being used for a custom view, click in the Parameters field for the desired view. The Change Parameters panel appears. Modify the parameter values as necessary and click OK. Note: The Parameters field displays the literal 'Click to Edit', indicating that a saved query is being used and parameters exist for the custom view. The literal 'None' appears, indicating that a save query is being used, but no parameters exists. The field is blank when a saved query is not being used for the custom view. 6. To copy an existing custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Copy. The Custom View Management panel appears. Specify a unique name for the custom view and click OK. The new custom view is added to the Build Views list. 7. To delete an existing custom view, select the view in the Build Views list and click Remove.

423 Profile Scheduler Load Local INF The Load Local INF profile type is used to download account balance information from Infinium into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. To Create/Maintain a Load Local INF Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Job - Load Local tab. Field Description Job Name Specify the name of the job. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job. Database Location: Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQL Server or MS Access type database. SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list only displays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load local connections and to which the user is authorized. Local Database Files Location (Local.accdb) When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location for the local database files. Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded local database files. Results Window (no label) Global Software, Inc. Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.

424 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Load Local INF - Ledger Selections tab. Field Description Library Specify the library from which to retrieve data. From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year. To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year. Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If not specified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering an account mask each segment of the account string must be keyed and delimited by a dash (i.e ). Account segments may be a single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list. To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and click the Add button. To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user, click the Profile button. Note: Regardless of the Account Mask s defined for loading the local database, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server. Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s). Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloaded records for only the year and type being processed, to find and replace records for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on the Ledger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected library.

425 Profile Scheduler Field Description Year and Ledger to Include This list displays the available year(s)/ledger(s) based upon the selection criteria entered, and is used to select the desired year(s)/ledger(s) to be downloaded. To populate the list, complete all selection criteria above and then click the Populate Selection List button. To filter data in the list, enter the desired value in the appropriate column filter field. To select year(s), click the associated Include check box. To select all years, click the Select All button. To deselect all selected years, click the Unselect All button. Records to be Loaded Based upon the selected years/ledgers, the system displays the number of records to be loaded. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job. Global Software, Inc.

426 418 Spreadsheet Server - Version Load Local JDE The Load Local JDE profile type is used to download account balance information from JD Edwards into local databases allowing for optimized calculation speeds. To Create/Maintain a Load Local JDE Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Job - Load Local tab. Field Description Job Name Specify the name of the job. Comments If desired, specify comments related to the job. Database Location: Database Type Click the down arrow and select whether to load the the data into a SQL Server or MS Access type database. SQL Connection When using a SQL Server database type, click the down arrow and select the connection to be used for connecting to the database. The list only displays SQL Server connections which are flagged as load local connections and to which the user is authorized. Local Database Files Location (Local.accdb) When using a MS Access database type, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location for the local database files. Copy Loaded Database To When using a MS Access database type, if desired, key the path or use the Browse button to select the location to which to copy the loaded local database files. Results Window (no label) Displays a list of what has been downloaded to the database.

427 Profile Scheduler Use the table to enter data on the Load Local JDE - Ledger Selections tab. Field Description Configuration Click the down arrow and select the host configuration from which to retrieve data. The list only displays configurations to which the user is authorized. Note: When the selected host configuration uses <Sign-On>, the user is prompted to sign on to the database if not already connected. From Year Click the down arrow and select the from reporting year. To Year Click the down arrow and select the to reporting year. Specific Ledger Types If desired, specify the ledger type(s) for which to retrieve balances. When selecting multiple types separate the types by a comma (i.e. AA,BA,CU). Summarize Balances by CO, BU, OBJ, and SUB If selected, account balances are summarized when the load is executed. Use Weekly F0902B for Selections If selected, account balances are retrieved from the Weekly F0902B file. Global Software, Inc.

428 420 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Account Mask Specify the account mask(s) for which to retrieve balances. If not specified, balances are retrieved for all accounts. When entering an account mask each segment of the account string must be keyed and delimited by a dash (i.e ). Account segments may be a single value, mask (wildcard), range, value list or segment list. To add an account mask, key the account mask in the field and click the Add button. To remove an account mask, select the desired account mask in the list and click the Remove button. To remove all account masks, click the Clear All button. To retrieve account masks from the Configurator for the current user, click the Profile button. Note: Regardless of the Account Mask s defined for loading the local database, normal user security applies when using Spreadsheet Server. Account Mask SQL Displays the SQL statement to be used to retrieve the account mask(s). Data Replacement Option Specify when downloading data whether to find and replace downloaded records for only the year and type being processed, to find and replace records for only the accounts defined in the Account Mask section on the Ledger Selections tab, or clear all data for the selected Configuration. 3. The Load Local JDE - Performance Indexes tab lists the available business unit and object account category codes, and allows for the user to select up to a maximum 22 of the most popular category codes used in Spreadsheet Server formulas. The system creates special indexes for the selected category codes, and uses these indexes to reduce the time required to process spreadsheet calculations. 4. Proceed to the next step, Schedule Job.

429 Profile Scheduler Schedule Job The Schedule tab allows the user to define various options as to when to execute the job. As Profile Scheduler works with the Windows Task Scheduler, when scheduling and running jobs various user right assignments and set up conditions may be required based upon the profile type and process (see Profile Scheduler Overview). Note: Ensure all preceding steps have been completed prior to entering data on the Schedule tab. To Create/Maintain the Schedule for a Job: 1. Use the table to enter data on the Schedule tab. Field Description Not Scheduled / Scheduled / Run Once Specify whether or not to schedule the execution of the job. Appropriate processing fields become input capable based upon the option selected. Externally Managed If selected, indicates that the scheduled job has been changed via the Windows Task Scheduler function. When this option is selected, scheduling criteria fields on the panel are disabled. Note: This feature is not applicable in a Windows XP environment. Start Date Click the down arrow and select the date to start the job. Start Time Click the down arrow and select the time to start the job. Global Software, Inc.

430 422 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Field Description Daily: Daily is used for multiple daily consecutive job runs. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specified number of Days or Hours. Note: When using Hours, the system begins with the Start Time and adds the number of hours up until midnight to create the scheduled jobs. Weekly: Weekly is used for multiple job runs for one or more days on a consecutive number of weeks. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, and Every specified number of Weeks for each selected Weekday. Monthly: Monthly is used for multiple job runs for a specific day of each selected month. This option requires the user to assign a Start Date, Start Time, the specific week and day of the week for each selected Month -or- Days (specific day of the month). Note: In a Windows XP environment, when using the Days option only one day may be selected for scheduling the job. Windows Credentials: Note: Does not apply to Distribution Manager jobs. Allow Job to Run While Logged If selected, the scheduled job may be run while the user is logged off the Off PC. User Name Specify the user ID to be used for the scheduled job. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the user name is required when scheduling a job. Password Specify the password to be used for the scheduled job. The system retains the password entered until the Schedule panel is redisplayed. Note: In a Windows XP environment, the password is required when scheduling a job.

431 Profile Scheduler If scheduling a job which contains mapped drives, proceed to the next step Define Mapped Drives. 3. Click OK. The system adds/updates the job and, if appropriate, adds the job to the Windows Task Scheduler. Note: When the scheduled date and time are reached, the program reconnects to the host and initiates the job. Scheduled jobs require the PC to be powered on; however, the user does not have to be signed into the operating system. Scheduled jobs may be altered via Profile Scheduler or Windows Task Scheduler; however, they may only be stopped or deleted via the Task Scheduler. For Windows 7 environments and above, the Task Scheduler may accessed from the Profile Scheduler panel by selecting Task Scheduler from the ribbon. Global Software, Inc.

432 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Define Mapped Drives The Mapped Drive tab allows the user to define the mapped drives to be created temporarily when a scheduled job is being processed. Mapped drives used in any part of the process, including Distribution Manager and Spreadsheet Server, must be defined. To Create/Maintain Mapped Drives for a Job: Use the table to enter data on the Mapped Drive tab. Field Description Drive Click the down arrow and select the letter to be assigned to the mapped drive. Folder Key the path or use the Browse button to select the desired folder location for the mapped drive. Click OK. The system adds/updates the job.

433 Profile Scheduler 12.8 Miscellaneous PS Items PS Settings 425 The Settings function panel allows the user to define various criteria to control processing in Profile Scheduler. 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select File and then click Settings. The Profile Scheduler Settings - General panel appears. 2. Use the table to enter data on the General panel. Field Description General Options: Process Timeout (minutes) Specify the maximum time (in minutes) allowed for a job to run. Enhanced Logging If selected, additional logging is recorded. For optimal processing, once an error has been resolved it is recommended to clear the log file and deselect the option (see PS View Log). Global Software, Inc.

434 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 Use the table to enter data on the Custom Table Loads panel. Field Description Data Replacement Threshold Options: Number of Existing Target Rows Specify the minimum number of rows which must exist in the target table in order for the system to determine whether or not to change the update order for more efficient processing (see Note 1). Percent of New Rows to Existing Target Rows Specify the minimum percent of new rows to existing target rows which must exist in order for the system to determine whether or not to change the update order for more efficient processing (see Note 1). Note 1: When processing a Custom Table Load job in update mode (i.e. Replace Data option is not selected), the system copies the appropriate rows from the source table to a temporary table, then copies all rows from the target table which are not already in the temporary table to the temporary table, and then deletes the target table and renames the temporary table to the new target table. When the number of rows in the target table are far greater than the number of rows in the temporary table, this method is inefficient. If the tables exceed the data replacement threshold options specified, then the system will change the update direction and move the temporary table rows into the target table instead of moving the target table rows to the temporary table.

435 Profile Scheduler The About panel displays Global's contact information. Click the Online Manuals link to access the online user manual. 5. Click OK. The system writes the changes and closes the panel. Global Software, Inc.

436 Spreadsheet Server - Version 14.6 PS View Log During the running a job, various logging information is recorded. Log entries may be viewed, copied or ed. 1. From the Profile Scheduler panel, select the Log tab. The Log panel appears displaying the level, date, time, profile type, job name, action, and description for each log entry. 2. To display the full description of a log entry, select the desired entry in the list. The full description appears at the bottom of the panel. 3. To copy selected records to the clipboard, on the Log panel first select the desired record(s) and then from the ribbon select Copy Errors: To copy a single record -- select the desired record. To copy select multiple records -- press and hold the Ctrl key as records are selected in the list. To copy multiple records in a range -- select the first record in the range, press and hold the Shift key, and select the last record in the range. 4. To the entire error log to the help desk, from the ribbon select Log. The system opens a new Outlook panel with the error log attached. Modify the address and/or text of the body as necessary and click the Send button. 5. To filter the entries in the log file, select the desired level(s), containing text, or date/time range in the Filter sections. The system displays only entries matching the selection criteria. From the ribbon select Clear Filter to reset all filter fields to their default value. 6. To search for a specific value in the log file, key the desired value in the Search For field and then from the ribbon select Find Next. The system highlights the first log entry containing the value. Select Find Next again, to find the next occurrence of the selected value. 7. To clear the log file, from the ribbon select Clear Log.

437 Profile Scheduler Database Management The Database Management tab is used for listing and maintaining tables and indexes for SQL Server load local databases, including importing legacy Infinium or JDE load local access databases into SQL Server load local databases. In addition, user-specified queries may be run against the database (this feature is password protected). A user's ability to access the Database Management tab is determined by a parameter setting defined in User settings in the Configurator. Contact Global for more information. Global Software, Inc.